You are on page 1of 311

PDMS ISODRAFT

Reference Manual
Version 11.6

pdms1160/ISODRAFT Reference Manual


issue 070904
PLEASE NOTE:
AVEVA Solutions has a policy of continuing product development: therefore, the
information contained in this document may be subject to change without notice.
AVEVA SOLUTIONS MAKES NO WARRANTY OF ANY KIND WITH REGARD TO
THIS DOCUMENT, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED
WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR
PURPOSE.
While every effort has been made to verify the accuracy of this document, AVEVA
Solutions shall not be liable for errors contained herein or direct, indirect, special,
incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing, performance or
use of this material.

This manual provides documentation relating to products to which you may not have
access or which may not be licensed to you. For further information on which Products
are licensed to you please refer to your licence conditions.

Copyright 1991 through 2004 AVEVA Solutions Limited


All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval
system or transmitted, in any form or by any means, electronic, mechanical,
photocopying, recording or otherwise, without prior written permission of AVEVA
Solutions.
The software programs described in this document are confidential information and
proprietary products of AVEVA Solutions or its licensors.

For details of AVEVA's worldwide sales and support offices, see our website at
http://www.aveva.com

AVEVA Solutions Ltd, High Cross, Madingley Road, Cambridge CB3 0HB, UK
Contents

1 Introduction to this Manual..........................................................................1-1


1.1 Who Should Use This Manual.................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 How this Manual is Organised................................................................................. 1-1
1.3 Conventions Used in This Manual ........................................................................... 1-2
2 Command Reference Section ......................................................................2-1
2.1 Conventions Used in the Syntax Graphs................................................................. 2-1
2.2 Command Summary ................................................................................................. 2-3
2.2.1 Setting Up ISODRAFT .................................................................................... 2-3
2.2.2 Bolting .............................................................................................................. 2-4
2.2.3 Design Requirements....................................................................................... 2-4
2.2.4 Piping Components in ISODRAFT ................................................................. 2-5
2.2.5 Customising the Drawing Sheet ..................................................................... 2-5
2.2.6 Materials List and Reports.............................................................................. 2-6
2.2.7 The Isometric Drawing .................................................................................... 2-8
2.3 Alphabetical Command Reference ......................................................................... 2-10
3 Symbol Keys .................................................................................................3-1
3.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 3-1
3.1.1 P-points............................................................................................................. 3-2
3.2 CAP Symbol Keys...................................................................................................... 3-3
3.3 CLOS Symbol Keys ................................................................................................... 3-4
3.4 COUP Symbol Keys................................................................................................... 3-5
3.5 CROS Symbol Keys ................................................................................................... 3-7
3.6 FBLI Symbol Keys .................................................................................................. 3-14
3.7 FILT Symbol Keys................................................................................................... 3-15
3.8 FLAN Symbol Keys ................................................................................................. 3-18
3.9 FTUB Symbol Keys ................................................................................................. 3-20
3.10 INST Symbol Keys .................................................................................................. 3-21
3.11 LJSE Symbol Keys .................................................................................................. 3-28
3.12 PCOM Symbol Keys ................................................................................................ 3-29
3.13 REDU Symbol Keys ................................................................................................ 3-33
3.13.1 Concentric Reducers ................................................................................. 3-33
3.13.2 Eccentric Reducers.................................................................................... 3-36
3.14 SHU Symbol Keys ................................................................................................... 3-39
3.15 TEE or OLET Symbol Keys .................................................................................... 3-40
3.16 TRAP Symbol Keys ................................................................................................. 3-45
3.17 UNIO Symbol Keys ................................................................................................. 3-48
3.18 UNIVERSAL Symbol Key....................................................................................... 3-49
3.19 VALV Symbol Keys ................................................................................................. 3-50
3.20 VENT Symbol Keys................................................................................................. 3-53
3.21 VFWA Symbol Keys ................................................................................................ 3-54
3.22 VTWA Symbol Keys ................................................................................................ 3-55

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual contents-i


Version 11.6
Contents

3.23 WELD Symbol Keys ................................................................................................ 3-56


3.24 Floor Penetration ATTA Symbol ............................................................................ 3-57
3.25 Symbol Key Reference Index .................................................................................. 3-58
4 Alternative Texts...........................................................................................4-1
4.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2 The Isometric Drawing Area .................................................................................... 4-1
4.3 The Title Block Area ................................................................................................. 4-6
4.4 The Plotted Material List ......................................................................................... 4-8
4.5 The Line Summary Area ........................................................................................ 4-11
4.6 The Printed Material List....................................................................................... 4-12
4.7 The Weld Box Summary ......................................................................................... 4-12
4.8 The Bend Table ....................................................................................................... 4-13
4.9 Dynamic Detail Areas ............................................................................................. 4-13
4.10 The Bolt Report ....................................................................................................... 4-13
5 The Material Control File ..............................................................................5-1
5.1 Introduction ............................................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Creating a Material Control File.............................................................................. 5-1
5.3 The File Format ........................................................................................................ 5-2
5.3.1 Overall File Structure...................................................................................... 5-2
5.3.2 Material Control File Record Identification Numbers................................... 5-4
5.3.3 Individual Formats for Each Type of Information Record............................. 5-5
5.4 Example of a Material Control File Output........................................................... 5-12

A Error Messages............................................................................................ A-1

B Examples of Isometric Plots........................................................................... B-1

C Transferring Data to the COMPIPE Module ................................................... C-1


C.1 Invoking the COMPIPE Interface in ISODRAFT .................................................. C-1
C.2 Controlling the Contents of the COMPIPE Files ................................................... C-1
C.3 Pipe Attributes ......................................................................................................... C-2
C.4 Detail Text Attributes.............................................................................................. C-2
C.5 Limitations ............................................................................................................... C-3
C.5.1 Itemcodes containing the / character ............................................................. C-3
C.5.2 Instruments and Supports Tag Names.......................................................... C-3
C.5.3 Material per Isometric Sheet ......................................................................... C-3
C.5.4 Specification Breaks ....................................................................................... C-3
C.5.5 System and Spool Isometrics.......................................................................... C-4
C.5.6 Use of MARK REV, MARK DETAIL, REPEATABILITY ON ...................... C-4
C.6 Format of COMPIPE Linelist File .......................................................................... C-4
C.7 Format of COMPIPE MTO FIle .............................................................................. C-6
D Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into
MicroStation ......................................................................................................... D-1
D.1 Introduction .............................................................................................................. D-1
D.2 Importing a DXF File............................................................................................... D-1
D.3 Fonts ......................................................................................................................... D-2

contents-ii VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Contents

D.3.1 Installing Fonts............................................................................................... D-2


D.3.2 Utilities/Install Fonts menu. .......................................................................... D-2
D.4 DXF/DGN translation: Making Fonts Active for the Import Function ................. D-2
D.5 Compilation of the DXF/DGN Macro Control File ................................................. D-3
D.6 Use of 16-bit Fonts (Far Eastern Fonts) ................................................................. D-3
D.7 Colour........................................................................................................................ D-4
D.8 Plotting the DGN file ............................................................................................... D-4

Index

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual contents-iii


Version 11.6
Contents

contents-iv VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
1 Introduction to this Manual

This document is a Reference Manual for PDMS ISODRAFT. It describes all the
commands available to control the production of isometric drawings. It also shows the
default Symbol KEYs (SKEYs) that are used to plot the drawings and gives examples of
plot files.

1.1 Who Should Use This Manual

This manual is aimed at experienced PDMS users and system administrators, who are
responsible for setting company standards for isometric production. It is assumed
readers have attended an Isometric Drawing Production training course, which covers
the relationship between the Catalogue database and ISODRAFT as well as ISODRAFT
itself.

1.2 How this Manual is Organised

This manual is divided up into a number of logical chapters, as follows:


Chapter 2 - Command Reference Section
This chapter gives reference information for all of the ISODRAFT commands.
Chapter 3 - Symbol Keys
This chapter illustrates the standard symbols used in ISODRAFT drawings, with their
reference codes (SKEYs), dimension and cataloguing requirements.
Chapter 4 - Alternative Texts
This chapter provides a complete listing of all standard text phrases used in ISODRAFT
drawings, with their reference codes (Alternative text or ATEXT numbers).
Chapter 5 - The Material Control File
This chapter describes the Material Control File which can be used to pass details of
material requirements to an external material control program.
Appendix A - Error Messages
This chapter explains the error messages which may be output during an ISODRAFT
session.
Appendix B - Examples of Isometrics
This appendix contains examples of isometric plots illustrating the main facilities
provided by ISODRAFT.
Appendix C - Transferring Data to the COMPIPE Module
This appendix gives details of how to pass ISODRAFT material data to the COMPIPE

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 1-1


Version 11.6
Introduction to this Manual

module of the COMDACE system. This is specialist information and need only be read
by those users who will use this facility.
Appendix D - Recommendations for Importing DXF Files from ISODRAFT into
MicroStation
This appendix gives details of how to import ISODRAFT Isometric drawings into
MicroStation as DXF files and then correct any colour and font errors that may occur.

1.3 Conventions Used in This Manual

Commands are shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters. In general,


these commands can be abbreviated. When a command is shown in this manual, the
capital letters of the command indicate the minimum abbreviation. (NOTE: This
convention does not mean that you have to type the second part of the command in
lowercase letters. You can enter commands in any combination of uppercase and
lowercase letters.)
For example, you can enter the command Check
in any of the following forms: CH
CHE
CHEC
CHECK
You cannot abbreviate commands shown wholly in uppercase letters.
Lowercase italics describe command arguments. You should replace the description
shown by the text or value you require. Here are some examples:

Name Definition Example


name A PDMS element name /PIPE-A63
refno A PDMS reference number =23/1403
integer A positive integer 3
value A positive or negative number 3.142
word A sequence of up to four letters FLOW
text An alphanumeric string Enclose between closing quotes
filename The path name of a file //net/sg99/testing. Note that when a full
path name is given, it will start with two
slashes: the first one is needed because
all names in PDMS must start with a
slash, and the second one is the root of
the path name.

1-2 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
2 Command Reference Section

2.1 Conventions Used in the Syntax Graphs

The commands described in this chapter are presented in the form of syntax graphs.
Commands are shown in a combination of uppercase and lowercase letters, where
the capital letters indicate the minimum abbreviation. (Note: This convention does
not mean that the second part of the command must be typed in lowercase letters;
commands may be entered in any combination of uppercase and lowercase letters.)
For example, the command
Create
can be input in any of the following forms:
CR
CRE
CREA
CREAT
CREATE
Commands shown in all uppercase letters cannot be abbreviated.
Command arguments are shown in lowercase letters. These are just descriptions of
what you need to enter. For example,
FONTDirectory name
means that to set the name of the Font Directory to newfonts, you enter
FONTD newfonts
Syntax graphs are read from top left to bottom right. The start point is shown by >,
and you can follow any path through the graph until the exit point, shown by >, is
reached.
Points marked with a plus sign (+) are option junctions which allow you to input any
one of the commands to the right of the junction. For example,
>---+--- ABC ---.
| |
|--- PQR ---|
| |
-----------+-
means you can type in ABC or PQR or just press Enter to get the default option.
Text in angle brackets <. . . > is the name of another syntax graph. This convention
is used for syntax which occurs in many places. The graphs referred to are described
at the end of this section. For example,

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-1


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

>---+--- ABC -----.


| |
|--- PQR -----|
| |
|--- <dia> ---|
| |
-------------+--->
means you can type in ABC or PQR or any command allowed by the syntax given in
diagram <dia> or just press Enter to get the default option.
Points marked with an asterisk (*) are loop back junctions. Command options
following these may be repeated as required. For example,
.-----<-------.
/ |
>---*--- option1 ---|
| |
|--- option2 ---|
| |
--- option3 ---+--->
means that you can enter any combination of option1 and/or option2 and/or option3,
where the options can be commands, other syntax diagrams, or command
arguments.
The simplified format
.----<------.
/ |
>---*--- name ----+--->
means that you may type in a list of PDMS names, separated by at least one space.
Names in lowercase letters enclosed in angled brackets (e.g. <gid>) represent
subsidiary syntax diagrams. Most of the subsidiary syntax diagrams are given in the
VANTAGE Plant Design Software Customisation Guide. The only ones used in this
manual are <gid> and <uval>.
In ISODRAFT, the <gid> syntax has the restricted range of options shown here.
>---+--- name ----.
| |
--- refno ---+--->
The full range of options for <gid> are shown in the Command Reference Section of
the VANTAGE Plant Design Software Customisation Guide. They apply only to
database navigation operations.
<uval> is used to enter a dimension using a unit of measurement which is not the
current default unit:

2-2 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

>---+-- value -----.


| |
-- <expres> --+-- EXponential -- value --.
| |
--------------------------+--- MM -------.
| |
|--- Metres ---|
| |
|--- INches ---|
| |
|--- FT -------|
| |
|--- FEet -----|
| |
|--- text -----|
| |
--------------+-->
where <expres> is another subsidiary diagram representing the range of
mathematical expressions which can be used to input values, and text represents a
user-defined unit of measurement. Using expressions in PDMS is described in the
VANTAGE Plant Design Software Customisation Guide, and also in the online help.
For example:
9.75 INCH
1.5 FT
Note: For information about the syntax for PML, the PDMS Programmable
Macro Language, and the PDMS forms and menus, see the VANTAGE
Plant Design Software Customisation Guide.

2.2 Command Summary

The following sections list the MODULE commands in functional groups. These sections
correspond Chapters 2 to 9 in the VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide.

2.2.1 Setting Up ISODRAFT


COMMAND Brief description
ADD Adds named elements to the list of elements to be processed
by the CHECK or DETAIL command.
CHANGE Represents changed items on a drawing in a different colour
HIGHLIGHTING pen.
CHECK Extracts isometric data from the database but does not pass
it to the plotting function. This is used to check the data or
create a transfer file.
DETAIL Generates and plots isometric drawings for the elements in
the list.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-3


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

COMMAND Brief description


FILE Specifies the name of the plot file to which the isometric
drawing output is sent.
INSTALLSETUP Restores the settings to those saved in the macro or binary
file using the RECREATE command.
MESSAGEFILENAME Specifies the name of the file to which messages about the
progress of the detailing are sent.
OPTIONS Allows you to reset all options to their default settings.
QUERY Allows you to find the current settings of the options.
RECREATE Creates a macro or binary file which can be read into
ISODRAFT to restore the current settings.
REMOVE Removes elements from the list to be detailed.
SETCOMPDATE Sets the Comparison Date for an MDB or DB.

2.2.2 Bolting
COMMAND Brief description
BOLTFILE Specifies the name of the bolt report file, produced using the
BOLTREPORT command.
BOLTING Specifies where and how the bolt lengths are to be shown in
the material list.
COMMAND Brief description
BOLTREPORT Allows you to output a report on the bolting containing
identical information to that displayed in the material list.

2.2.3 Design Requirements


COMMAND Brief description
JOINTNUMBERS Allows you to display the joint numbers
created in SPOOLER on the isometric.
MATERIAL PARTNUMBERS FROMDB Allows you to select whether to use the part
numbering from the DB.
PBENDNUMBERS Allows you to display the pulled bend
numbers created in SPOOLER on the
isometric.
SPOOLNUMBERS FROMDB Lets you specify whether to use the
numbers created by SPOOLER or let
ISODRAFT number the spools itself.

2-4 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

COMMAND Brief description


WELDNUMBERS FROMDB Lets you decide whether to use the numbers
created by SPOOLER or let ISODRAFT
number the spools itself.

2.2.4 Piping Components in ISODRAFT


COMMAND Brief description
LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE Allows you to specify an additional length on cut
tube to compensate for field-fitted welds and loose
flanges, where the ALLO attribute has not been set.

2.2.5 Customising the Drawing Sheet


COMMAND Brief description
ATEXT Allows you to change the standard text on isometric
drawings.
CUTMARKS Draws cut marks at each corner of the overall
drawing sheet.
DATE Allows you to specify the format for showing the date
in the drawings title block.
DISTANCES Allows you to specify the units to be used for input of
lengths and distances.
FRAME Specifies whether or not drawing frame lines and text
are drawn.
ISO Defines the view direction to be used for generating
the isometric plot.
ISOTYPE Defines whether the isometric will show fabrication
information, erection information or both.
MARGIN Specifies the width of the margin on each side of the
drawing.
MARK Allows you to define whether the pipe revision
attribute (REV) should be incremented and the
Branch detail attribute should be set to true after
successful detailing.
PLOTDETAILDATA Allows you to define whether and how to display
parameterised attribute data in the detail plot files.
PLOTTINGSCALE Defines the scale of the plot independently of the
drawing sheet size.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-5


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

COMMAND Brief description


PROJECTNUMBER Writes the project number into the title block area.
RESERVE Allows you to specify a blank area at the bottom of
either the drawing or material list areas.
SIZE Specifies the overall dimensions of the drawing sheet.
STACKINGARRANGEMENTS Allows you to define how to position multiple plots on
a single sheet.
TITLEBLOCK Allows you to add extra text to the title block.
UNDERLAYPLOTNAME Allows you to define a background plot file; letting
you plot directly on top of this background plot.

2.2.6 Materials List and Reports


COMMAND Brief description
ATTEXTS Defines selection rules and expressions (typically
attribute values) for appending attached text to
descriptions in material lists.
CLLENGTHFILE Specifies that a pipe centreline length summary, with
or without an insulation centreline summary, should
be output as a report.
CUTPIPELISTFILE Produces a customisable report giving details of all
cut pipes in the isometric.
CUTTINGLIST Defines a table in the material list showing details of
all the cut pipes in the isometric.
DELIMITER Specifies which character ISODRAFT recognises as
the itemcode suffix delimiter.
DTEXTS Controls the material description part of the item
description.
EQUIPMENTNUMBERING Controls numbering of items on materials list for an
equipment trim isometric.
INSTNAME Allows you to define how instruments are described
in the materials list.
ITEMCODE Allows you to label certain types of fitting with their
itemcodes on the isometric drawing.
KEYS Allows components with specified SKEYs to be
treated like instruments.
MATERIALLIST Allows you to control whether the material list is
drawn on the isometric and alter the display format if
required.

2-6 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

COMMAND Brief description


MATLISTFILENAME Specifies the name of the file into which the
materials list can be saved.
MTEXTS Controls the complete material description part of the
item description.
SUPPORTFILENAME Specifies the name of a file into which the schedule
for pipe supports is saved.
WASTAGEAREA Defines wastage areas that can be given different
wastage factors for cut pipe lengths.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-7


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

2.2.7 The Isometric Drawing


COMMAND Brief description
ANGLEACCURACY Allows you to specify the degree of accuracy for the
reporting of angles.
ATTANAME Specifies the ways in which support ATTAs are
identified.
AXES Specifies the coordinate system to be used for showing
3D positions on drawings.
BENDRADIUS Specifies when radii of pulled bends will be shown and
in what units.
CHARSIZE Specifies the character size to be used for annotating
text on drawings.
CONTINUATIONSYMBOLS Plots continuation symbols where pipes are connected to
nozzles on plant equipment.
CONTNOTES Specifies continuation notes at the end points on
drawings for when the connection goes to another
isometric.
COORDINATES Specifies the drawing locations at which spatial
coordinates are shown.
DIMDIST Specifies the standout distance, between dimensioning
lines and pipe/ component centrelines.
DIMENSIONS Specifies dimensioning style.
ELEVATION Specifies whether or not elevation coordinates are to be
shown.
FALLINGLINES Defines the maximum rate of fall allowed in a pipeline
before it is shown as a skew.
FALLSKEWS Controls how dimensioning boxes for skewed/falling
pipelines are shown.
FLOWARROWS Allows flow arrows to be shown on isometric plots.
INSULATIONCONTROL Specifies whether or not insulation is to be plotted.
LEGLENGTH Allows you to specify the plotted leg length of elbows,
tees and crosses.
MESSAGEACCUR-ACY Controls how arrowed messages on the isometric are
positioned.
OUTCOM Defines the style in which attributes are shown on the
isometric drawing area.

2-8 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

COMMAND Brief description


OVERALLSKEWS Allows you to specify whether triangular skewboxes are
shown as overall skewboxes across branches, or as
separate skewboxes between branch connections.
PICTURESCALE Allows you to set the scale of the isometric drawing.
REFDIMENSIONS Switches the display of reference dimensions on and off.
REPEATABILITY Creates split ATTAs at automatically generated split
points.
SKEWBOX Controls how skewed piping is shown.
SPECBREAK Specifies the level at which a change of pipeline
specification is noted, and which changes are shown.
SPLIT Controls the number of drawing sheets used when a
pipeline is split over more than one sheet.
SUPPORTS Defines whether support positions are shown and are
dimensioned as overall or string dimensions.
TAGGING Allows you to identify individual components on the
isometric plot by means of name tags.
TOLERANCE Specifies the maximum misalignment between
components regarded as having the same axis.
TRACINGCONTROL Specifies whether or not tracing is to be plotted.
TRUNCATE Stops rounding remainders of dimensions being added
to the next dimension.
TUBESPLITS Controls how splits in tube are placed.
UNITS Specifies units of measurement to be used for
ISODRAFTs output.
WELDID Allows you to identify individual welds on the isometric
by name.
WELDNUMBERS Controls numbering the welds on an isometric.
WELDTYPE Controls which types of end connection are shown on
drawings.
ZEROLENGTH-SKEWS Allows you to connect a vertical Branch to a falling line.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-9


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

2.3 Alphabetical Command Reference

2-10 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ADD

Function: Adds named elements to the list of elements to be processed by


the next CHECK or DETAIL command.

Description: The elements to be checked or detailed by ISODRAFT can be


defined before giving a CHECK or DETAIL command by setting up
a Detail List. You add elements to the list using the ADD
command and remove them using the REMOVE command. (The
REMOVE command is often used to remove members of an owning
element such as Site or Zone which have been added.) The next
CHECK ALL or DETAIL ALL command will then process all the
elements in the Detail List.
If a Pipe is detailed with repeatability on, split points can be
stored in the Design database. As such, individual sheets can be
added to the Detail List. See the REPEATABILITY command.

Examples:
ADD /ZONE2 /PIPE3-2
Adds Zone 2 and PIPE3-2 to the Detail List.
ADD SHEE 2 /PIPE-2
Adds sheet 2 of PIPE-2 to the Detail List.
ADD SHEE SING /PIPE2
Adds /PIPE-2 to the Detail List, and specifies that the
isometric will be plotted on a single sheet
ADD SPOO 2 /PIPE-4
Adds spool 2 of /PIPE-4 to the Detail List.
ADD SPOO 2 OF 3 /PIPE-4
Adds spool 2 of sheet 3 of /PIPE-4 to the Detail List. This form of the command can only
be used in conjunction with SPOOLNUMBERS PERDRAWING.
ADD SPOO SPOO20 /PIPE-5
Adds the spool identified by the text SPOO20 of /PIPE-5 to the Detail List.
Related Commands:
REMOVE CHECK DETAIL REPEATABILITY (continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-11


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ADD (continued)

Command Syntax:
.----<------------------------------------------------.
/ |
>-- ADD --*-- <gid> ----------------------------------------------|
| |
|-- SHEETNumber --+-- integer --. |
| | | |
| -- SINGle ---+-----------. |
| | |
-- SPOOl ---+-- integer --.-- OF integer --| |
| | | |
| ----------------| |
| | |
-- text -----------------------+-- <gid> --+-->
Restrictions:
The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in an Add
List is 100.
The maximum number of items for any single pipe (sheets or
spools) is 20. You can only add sheets for a Pipe which has
previously been detailed with REPEATABILITY on, so that split
points have been stored in the Design database. See the
REPEATABILITY command.

Querying: Q DETaillist Lists contents of both Add and


Remove lists.

2-12 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ANGLEACCURACY

Function: Allows you to specify the degree of accuracy for the reporting of
angles on the isometric.

Description: For bend and elbow angles, and orientation angles for tees, valve
and instrument spindles, you can vary the accuracy with which
ISODRAFT reports the angle on the isometric.
You can use one of two settings:
0 To the nearest 0.1 degree (default)
1 To the nearest 0.01 degree

Examples:
ANGLEACC 1 Sets angle reporting accuracy to the nearest 0.01 degree.

Related Commands:
FALLINGLINES

Command Syntax:

>--- ANGLEACCuracy value --->


where value is either 0 or 1 (as described above).

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-13


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ATEXT

Function: Allows you to change standard text on isometric drawings.

Description: Each standard annotation text on an ISODRAFT drawing is


identified by a unique code number, known as its Atext
(Alternative Text) number. The ATEXT command allows you to
change the text characters associated with a particular Atext
number, so that your text replaces the standard text at the same
place on the drawing.
Alternative text should contain only standard ISODRAFT
characters, since certain keyboard symbols cannot be reproduced
by ISODRAFT. The normal character set for ISODRAFT consists
of:
The letters A to Z inclusive
The letters a to z inclusive
The numbers 0 to 9 inclusive
The space character
+-
*.,[]():#=|
Text can be deleted by redefining it as a null string, that is, the
Atext number followed by two quotes with no characters between
them.
Text is reset to the standard by giving the command ATEXT just
followed by the Atext number.
See Appendix D for a list of all standard Atexts with their
corresponding Atext numbers.

Examples:
ATEXT 15 STRAIGHT TUBE
Sets Atext 15 to the specified wording.
ATEXT 15 Resets Atext 15 to its default wording, STRAIGHT PIPE.
ATEXT 410 Deletes Atext number 410, the line summary note.

(continued)

2-14 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ATEXT (continued)

Command Syntax:

>--- ATExt --- atextnumber ---+--- newtext ---.


| |
---------------+--->
where atextnumber identifies the text to be changed and newtext
defines the new text to be associated with that Atext number.
(Note that newtext must be enclosed between quotes in the usual
way.)

Querying:

Q ---- ATExt ---+--- integer --------.


| |
|--- DRAWing --------|
| |
|--- TITLeblock -----|
| |
|--- PRINtedmatl ----|
| |
|--- PLOTtedmatl ----|
| |
|--- LINEsummary ----|
| |
|--- WELDbox --------|
| |
|--- BOLTreport -----|
| |
|--- BENDtable ------|
| |
--- ALL ------------+--->

Q ATEXT 15 Gives current text for Atext 15.


Q ATEXT DRAW Gives current text for all Atexts associated with the drawing area.
Appendix D lists Atexts grouped under the areas with which they
are associated. Settings changed from the default are shown by
asterisks *.
Q ATEXT ALL Gives current text for all Atexts. Settings changed from the default
are shown by asterisks *.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-15


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ATTEXTS

Function: Allows you to append text,typically UDA and/or other attribute


settings, to descriptions in material lists.

Description: Standard descriptions in material lists comprise a geometric


description (RTEX attribute of DTEXT) and a material description
(XTEX attribute of MTEXT). This command lets you append
further text defined by an expression (typically including settings
of UDAs or other attributes) if a predefined selection rule gives a
True result.

Examples:
ATTEX (Flange '+AFTER (NAME,'/')+' at position '+STR
(POS)+' has 'STR (NWELDS)+' additional welds') ON all
flange with (NWELDS GT 0)
If a flange has additional welds, appends the text 'Flange /name at
position position has number additional welds' to the item
description in the material list.
ATTEX (Colour: ' + :Colour) ON ALL BRANCH MEMBERS
Appends the text 'Colour: colour_defined_by_UDA_ :Colour' to the
descriptions of all branch members.

Command Syntax:

>- ATTEXts -+- expression - ON - selection_rule -.


| |
`- NONE -----------------------------+->

where expression defines the text to be appended if selection_rule


evaluates to a True result.

2-16 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ATTANAME

Function: Specifies the ways in which support ATTAs are identified on


ISODRAFT drawings.

Description: By default, the names of support attachment points (that is, all
ATTAs for which the ATTY attribute is unset) are not shown on
the isometric plot and their SPREFs (specification references) are
used as their itemcodes.
You can use the ATTANAME command to display the PDMS
names of support ATTAs on the drawings, and to specify whether
their PDMS names or their SPREFs are used as their itemcodes.
By default, ATTA names are not shown on the isometric plot and
their SPREFs are used as their itemcodes.

Examples:
ATTANAME DRAWING
Support ATTAs identified by name on the drawing; SPREFs used as
itemcodes.
ATTANAME SPREF
Support ATTAs identified by name on the drawing; names also used as
itemcodes.
ATTANAME OFF
ATTA names not shown on drawings; SPREFs used as itemcodes.
Command Syntax:

>--- ATTAName ---+--- DRAwing ---.


| |
|--- SPREf -----|
| |
--- OFF* ------+--->

Querying: Q ATTAName
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-17


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

AXES

Function: Specifies the coordinate system to be used for showing 3D


positions on drawings.

Description: By default, all spatial coordinates on isometrics are given in the


World coordinate system. The AXES command allows you to
specify a different coordinate system for the isometric. You can
use the origin of any database element which has an origin.
Each owning element (Site, Zone etc.) in a design project has its
own coordinate system for locating the elements it owns. The
coordinates of an element are usually defined with respect to its
owner, and these coordinates are not normally the same as World
coordinates.

Examples:
AXES /SITE_PIPE-2
All coordinates to be referred to the origin of site SITE_PIPE-2.
AXES WORLD
Resets to the default of the World coordinates.

Command Syntax:

>--- AXES --- <gid> --->

Querying: Q AXES
Q OPTions
Note: To minimise inaccuracies when performing calculations using very
large coordinates, ISODRAFT performs all its calculations relative to
the origin of the Zone that owns the first Branch in the detail list. Thus
when creating piping a great distance from the World origin, it is
beneficial to move the Zone origin first, to a position local to where the
piping will be created. (If the Zone origin is at the World origin, no
benefit will be gained by this approach.)

2-18 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

BENDRADIUS

Function: Specifies when radii of pulled bends will be shown on drawings


and in what units.

Description: By default, bend radii will be output in distance units for all
pulled bends, that is for all components with SKEYs beginning
with PB. The radii of pulled bends are extracted from their RADI
attributes. If the RADI attribute is set to zero and the SKEY is of
the format PBnD where n is an integer (e.g. PB5D), then the
integer will be extracted, multiplied by the pipe diameter,
converted to distance units if appropriate, and output as the bend
radius.
Bend radii can be shown either in distance units or as multiples
of pipe diameters (where pipe diameter is taken as the nominal
bore of the pipe). The Atexts associated with the output of bend
radii are Atext 337, D BEND RADIUS (for bend radii in
multiples of pipe diameters), and Atext 338, BEND RADIUS (for
bend radii in distance units). Setting either of these to be blank
causes the entire message to be suppressed, including the actual
radius value.
A standard radius for bends can be set using the BENDRADIUS
STANDARD command. If a standard radius is set, only bends
which have radii different from the standard radius will have
their radii shown individually. Both the standard radius and any
individual radii will be shown in the same format (i.e. in distance
units or in pipe diameters).
A note giving the value of the standard radius can be positioned
on the sheet using the POSITION command. The usual method is
to plot a suitable message , such as:
All pulled bends to be D unless otherwise shown
as part of an underlay (see the UNDERLAYPLOTFILE command).
Then use the POSITION command to create text giving the actual
radius value in the space immediately before the D.
You can also include a table of bending data on the isometric
using the POSITION command (see POSITION BENDTABLE
command for more details). (continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-19


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

BENDRADIUS (continued)

Examples:
BENDRAD DEFAULT
BENDRAD
All bend radii to be shown in current distance units (no standard
value).
BENDRAD STAND 200
Bend radii to be shown in mm, but only if not equal to 200 mm
(assumes current distance units are mm).
BENDRAD DIAM
Bend radii to be shown as multiples of pipe diameters.
BENDRAD STAND 5 DIAM
Bend radii to be shown as multiples of pipe diameters, but only if
they do not equal 5 diameters.
BENDRAD OFF
No bend radii to be shown on the drawing.
BENDRADIUS STANDARD 5D
POSI BENDRADIUS AT X200 Y50
Standard bend radius note output at specified position. Only non-
standard radii output on isometric. Both standard note and non-
standard radii output in multiples of pipe diameter.
BENDRAD STAN 1000
POSI BENDRAD AT X200 Y50
Standard bend radius note output at specified position. Only non-
standard radii output on isometric. Both standard note and non-
standard radii output in current distance units (mm or inch).

Command Syntax:

>-- BENDRADius --+-- DEFault -----------------------------.


| |
|-- STANdard -- value --. |
| | |
|-----------------------+-- Diameters ---|
| | |
| ----------------|
-- OFF ---------------------------------+-->

2-20 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

Querying: Q BENDRADius
Q OPTions

BOLTFILE

Function: This specifies the name of the bolt report file produced via the
BOLTREPORT command.

Description: The bolt report file is an ASCII file. You can specify a page length
for the file (with a default of 55 lines), and whether the report
should append to an existing file (default) or overwrite an existing
file.

Examples:
BOLTF /BOLTREP1
Gives the resulting bolt report file the name BOLTREP1. If this
file already exists, the information produced from the BOLTREPORT
command will be added to the end of the existing file.
BOLTF /BOLTREP1 OVER
Specifies that the bolt report file should overwrite ANY existing
file of the same name.
BOLTF /BOLTREP1 WI 70 LI
Specifies that the bolt report file name is BOLTREP1 and that it
has a page length of 70 lines.

Related Commands:
BOLTING BOLTREPORT MATERIALLIST

Command Syntax:

>-----BOLTFile filename ---+---OVERwrite--------.


| |
--WIth value LInes -+--->

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-21


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

BOLTING

Function: Specifies where and how bolt lengths are to be shown in the
material list.
Description: ISODRAFT calculates bolting requirements from the Catalogue
bolt tables. Bolt lengths can be included in the itemcode or the
item description or both. If bolt lengths are to be included in the
itemcodes, they can either be appended to the rest of the code or
they can be inserted in place of a specified text string.
By default, bolt lengths are included in the item description
column of the material list and are appended to the itemcodes.
For the Material Control File, you can specify that the lengths
and diameters are both shown as metric, or both shown as
imperial. Setting the Material Control file units changes the bolt
dimensioning units specified by the UNITS command; it sets a
flag in the Material Control File (the tens column of Word 2 of
Record 60). This flag setting can be interpreted by an independent
material control program, which must provide its own look-up
tables of standard size conversions to give the required
dimensioning units.
You can set up the SPCOM name in the Specification to include
text which can then be replaced by the bolt lengths to form the
itemcode.
Examples:
BOLT LENG DESC ON
Bolt lengths shown in description column of material list.
BOLT LENG ITEMCODE INSERT AT Here
Bolt lengths replace locating text Here in the itemcode.
BOLT LENG DESC OFF ITEMCODE INSERT Here
Bolt lengths omitted from description column, but inserted in itemcode
column where shown by the Here keyword.
BOLTing LENgth ITEMcode APPend
Adds the bolt length to the end of the itemcode.
(continued)

2-22 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

BOLTING (continued)

BOLTing LENgth ITEMcode OFF


Bolt lengths not shown in itemcode.
BOLTING DEFAULT
Resets all bolting options to their default states, namely:
Lengths shown in descriptions.
Lengths appended to itemcodes.
Material control units flag set to metric lengths and imperial diameters.
BOLTing OFF Bolting information will not be shown on the
material list.

Command Syntax:
>- BOLTing --+-- UNITs --+-- METImp* ---.
| | |
| |-- METric ----|
| | |
| |-- IMPerial --
| | |
| -- DEFault ---+-------------------------------.
| |
| .----------------------------------------. |
| / | |
|-- LENgth --*-- DESCription --+-- ON* --. | |
| | | | | |
| | -- OFF --+--------------| |
| | | |
| -- ITEMcode --+-- OFF --------------------| |
| | | |
| |-- APPend* ----------------| |
| | | |
| -- INSert -+- AT -. | |
| | | | |
| ------+- text -+--|
| |
| |
|-- DEFault --. |
| | |
-- OFF ------+--------------------------------------------+->

Querying: Q BOLTing
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-23


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

BOLTREPORT

Function: Allows you to output a bolt report containing equivalent


information to that contained in the material list.
Description: BOLTREPORT generates a material list file relevant to bolting.
You dont need to have all the piping geometry correct before
creating a report, but you do have to have the pipes populated
with flanges and flanged components. Note that it is vital to have
connectivity correct before generating the report to make sure
that all pipes are fully scanned.
You can include positional information in the report, consisting of
the centrelines of associated flanges in the coordinate system (as
defined by the AXES command)
Note that bolting reports can be produced even if you have turned
material lists off (with the MATEriallist OFF command).
If you specify a filename for the report using the BOLTFILE
command the information will be output to an ASCII file.
Otherwise the report will be sent to your screen.
Finally, you should note that in the material list the the bolt
diameter is output in the units determined by the UNITS option,
and the bolt length inserted in the itemcode and description is
output in units determined by the BOLTING UNITS option (this is
because all items in the material list must take the same
diameter units). The bolting report, however, does not have this
restriction. That is, the units of the diameter of the bolt are
determined by the BOLTING UNITS option.
The report will contain the following information:
Diameter in mm or inches (determined by the BOLTING UNITS
command)
Length in mm or inches (determined by the BOLTING UNITS
command)
Itemcode (format defined by options settings, not truncated)
Description (unless MATERIALLIST NODESCRIPTIONS has been
set)

(continued)

2-24 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

BOLTREPORT (continued)

Position (if requested in the BOLTREPORT syntax)


Quantity for erection and/or quantity for fabrication materials. The
quantity will be summated if the diameter, length and itemcode
are identical. Erection and fabrication quantities are summated
separately.

Examples:
BOLTR /PIPE-1 Outputs a bolting report for PIPE-1.
BOLTR ALL WITH POS
Outputs a bolting report for all pipes in the detail list, including positional
information.

Related Commands:
BOLTING BOLTFILE MATERIALLIST

Command Syntax:

.---------<---------.
| |
>-- BOLTReport --+---------+---- <gid> --------|
| | |
-- ALL --+-- WITH POSition --|
| |
-------------------+-->

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-25


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

BORES

Function: Allows you to specify the units for input of pipe nominal bores.

Description: The default units for the input of dimensions (i.e. the units which
are assumed if you enter a dimension simply as a value) are
normally derived from the Catalogue. You may change the default
units independently for input of pipe bores and/or distances along
pipelines or across components by using the related BORES and
DISTANCES commands.
Note that the UNITS command is used to set output units.
The current default units can be overridden for any item of input
data by giving the units explicitly.

Examples:
MM BORES Input bores assumed to be in mm unless otherwise
specified.
INCH BORES Input bores assumed to be in inches unless
otherwise specified.
FINCH BORES Input bores assumed to be in feet and inches
unless otherwise specified (e.g. 13 represents
1ft 3in, 9 represents 9in).

Related Commands:
DISTANCES

Command Syntax:

>---+--- MILlimetre ---.


| |
|--- MM -----------|
| |
|--- FInch --------|
| |
--- INch ---------+--- BOres -------.
| |
--- DIstances ---+--->

Querying: Q UNIts

2-26 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING

Function: Represents changed items on a drawing in a different colour.

Description: Change Highlighting enables you to set standards for how


changed items on drawings will be represented.
By default, Change Highlighting is OFF. If set ON, then all
changed components complying with the defined change
highlighting rules, will be shown in the specified highlight colour.
A Change Rule applies to components only. For table entries,
material list entries, annotations and dimensions; these will
always be drawn in the specified highlight colour if they have
changed. The default highlight colour is red. The user may specify
one of 12 pen colours to represent the changed items. The integer
associated with each colour is as follows: 1 = grey, 2 = red, 3 =
orange, 4 = yellow, 5 = green, 6 = cyan, 7 = blue, 8 = violet, 9 =
brown, 10 = white, 11 = pink, 12 = mauve.
In order to determine which items have changed you must specify
a Comparison Date, this determines the baseline in time for the
drawing. Any item that has changed since this baseline time will
then be subject to Change Highlighting. The Comparison Date is
entered either as an actual date/time or as a Stamp. A Stamp is a
way of referencing database(s) at specified stages in a project. For
more information on Stamps refer to the VANTAGE PDMS
ADMIN Command Reference Manual and the VANTAGE PDMS
ADMIN User Guide.

Examples:
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING ON
Turns the Change Highlighting function 'on'.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING OFF
Turns the Change Highlighting function 'off'.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING CLEAR
Removes all defined Change Highlighting rules.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE ALL ELBO WITH (MODIFIED())
All modified elbows will be shown in the selected highlight pen
colour.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE ALL ELBO WITH
(MODIFIED(POS))
All elbows whose position has been modified will be shown in the
selected highlight pen colour.
(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-27


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING (continued)

CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE ALL ELBO WITH (CREATED())


All newly created elbows will be shown in the selected highlight
pen colour.
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING COLOUR 8
Sets the Change Highlighting pen colour to violet.

Related Commands:
SETCOMPDATE

Command Syntax:

>--- CHANGE---|--- HIGHLIGHTING---+-- ON ---------------------.


|-- OFF --------------------|
|-- CLEAR ------------------|
|-- COLOUR ----- integer ---|
`-- RULE ----+-- UNSET -----|
`-- <SELATT> --+--->

Querying: Q CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING


Q CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING MODE
Q CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING COLOUR
Q CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING RULE

CHARHEIGHT

Function: Specifies the character height to be used for annotating text on


drawings.

Description: The CHARHeight command defines the height of characters used


on isometric drawings.
This command does not affect characters: on the material list,
which are controlled by the MATERIALLIST CHARHeight
command; weld numbers or characters in the title block and
frame.

Example:
CHARH 2.0 corresponds to 2.0 mm
CHARH 0.125 INCH
corresponds to 1/8 inch

2-28 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

Command Syntax:

>--- CHARHeight - value ----->

Querying: Q CHARHeight
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-29


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

CHECK

Function: Creates a transfer file.

Description: The CHECK command extracts isometric data from the Design
and Catalogue databases and creates a transfer file.
The extended CHECK AS ... option allows you to check a complete
system isometric with a single command.
The extended CHECK AS EQUIPMENT ... option allows you to
check a collection of pipes as equipment trim.
If a Pipe is detailed with repeatability on, split points can be
stored in the Design database. In this case, individual sheets can
be added to the Detail List. See the REPEATABILITY command.

Examples:
CHECK /SITE2-1 /PIPE-2-2-1
Checks named elements only.
CHECK ALL
Checks the current Detail List (see the ADD and REMOVE commands).
CHECK /SITE2-1 /SITE2-2 AS REFINER
Checks the two named sites and combines the plot information into a single
system isometric with the drawing title REFINER.
CHECK SHEETN 2 /PIPE-2
Checks sheet 2 of PIPE-2.
CHECK SPOO 2 /PIPE-4
Checks spool 2 of PIPE-4.
CHECK SPOO 2 OF 3 /PIPE-4
Checks spool 2 of sheet 3 of /PIPE-4.
CHECK ISO BASEFLOOR /SITE2-1 /PIPE2-2-1
Checks the named elements of drawing BASEFLOOR.

Related Commands:
ADD DETAIL REMOVE SPOOLNUMBERS

(continued)

2-30 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

CHECK (continued)

Command Syntax:
.------------------------------------------.
| |
>- CHeck -*- <gid> ----------------------------------|
| |
|- ALL ------------------------------------|
| |
|- SHEETNumber -+- integer -. |
| | | |
| - SINGle --+----. |
| | |
|- SPOOl -+- integ -+- OF integ -| |
| | | | |
| | ------------| |
| | | |
| -- text --------------+- <gid> -+- AS -+- text -----------.
| | | |
| ------+- EQUIpment text -|
| |
--- ISOdrawing - <gid> ---------------------------------------------+->

Restrictions: The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in a CHECK


command is 100.
A maximum of 20 CHECK commands are allowed for a single pipe
(sheets or spools). The maximum number of items for any single
pipe (sheets or spools) is 20. You can only check sheets for a Pipe
which has previously been detailed with Repeatability on, so that
split points have been stored in the Design database. See the
REPEATABILITY command. Sheets and spools can be specified in
the same command as normal pipes.

Querying: Q DETaillist

Shows the current content of the Drawlist.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-31


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

CLLENGTHFILE

Function: Specifies that a pipe centreline length summary, with or without


an insulation centreline summary, should be output.

Description: ISODRAFT can produce two types of summary which can be


output to file:
A pipe centreline length summary
A pipe plus insulation centreline length summary
Note that the materials list can also be output to a file using the
MATLISTFILENAME command.

Examples: CLLE /FILE1


Produces a pipe centreline length summary only.
CLLE INSU /FILE1
Produces a pipe plus insulation centreline length summary.
CLLE INSU /FILE1 OVER
Produces a pipe plus insulation centreline length summary, overwriting
contents of FILE1.
CLLE OFF
Suppresses any further generation of centreline summary files. This is the
default state.

Command Syntax:

>--- CLLEngthfile --+----------------.


| |
|-- INSUlation --+-- filename --+-- OVER ---.
| | |
| -----------|
| |
|----- OFF* --------------------------------|
| |
-------------------------------------------+--->

Restrictions:
Note that pipe and pipe plus insulation summaries cannot both be
produced in a single run. If either type of file is specified, the
other is suppressed automatically.

2-32 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

Querying: Q CLLENGTHFILE

CONTINUATIONSYMBOLS

Function: Plots continuation symbols where pipes are connected to nozzles


on plant equipment.

Description: Dotted nozzles can be plotted on isometrics at points where


connections are made to plant equipment. This command can only
be used for combined or erection-only isometrics.
The default is that nozzles will not be plotted.

Examples:
CONT NOZZles
Plots dotted nozzles.
CONT OFF
Switches dotted nozzle plotting off.

Command Syntax:

>--- CONTinuationsymbols ---+--- NOZZles ---.


| |
--- OFF * -----+--->

Querying: Q CONTinuationsymbols
Q OPTIONS

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-33


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

CONTNOTES

Function: Specifies continuation notes at the end points on drawings for


when the drawing continues onto another isometric (as opposed to
when the drawing continues onto another sheet of the same
isometric).

Description: The note can include the name of the continuation pipe, drawing,
or both, as defined by the SPOOLER module. If the termination
point on the current isometric is a weld, you can include a
description of the connecting component or tube in the notes.

Examples:
CONTN PI
Continuation notes show pipe names only.
CONTN BO DESC ON
Continuation notes show both pipe and drawing names, and will include
descriptions for welds of the connecting component.

Command Syntax:

>- CONTNotes -+-- PIpe --.


| |
|-- DRwg --|
| |
-- BOth --+- DESCriptions -+-- ON ---.
| | |
| -- OFF --|
| |
--------------------------+-->

CONTWELDS

Function: Allows you to plot welds on the current isometric that are to
belong to another drawing.

Description: When an isometric continues onto another sheet and the


connecting item is a weld, you can use the CONTWELDS
command to plot that weld on the current isometric.
When plotted on the current isometric, the continuing weld will be
given a letter identifier instead of a number identifier. This tells
you that the weld actually belongs to another drawing.

2-34 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

Examples:
CONTW ON Switches continuation notes for welds on.

Command Syntax:

>---CONTWelds---+--ON--.
| |
-OFF--+--->

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-35


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

COORDINATES or COORDS

Function: Specifies the drawing locations at which spatial coordinates are to


be shown.

Description: Spatial coordinates are shown on the drawing, by default, at all


pipe termination or connection points. You can stop coordinates
being plotted at specified types of location on the isometric.

Examples:
COORDS OFF
No end coordinates will be shown.
COORDS ON
COORDS DEFAULT
All end coordinates will be shown.
COORDS ON AT PIPE NOZZ VENT
End coordinates will be shown only at pipe continuations, Nozzle
connections and Vents.
COORDS ON AT MISCELLANEOUS
End coordinates will only be shown at end locations which are not
any of the following: Pipe, Nozzle, Open, Clos, Vent or Dran. For
example, coordinates will be shown at an unconnected flange.
COORDS OFF AT VENT DRAN CLOS
Suppresses coordinates at the specified types of component.
Coordinates will be plotted at all other types of pipe termination
or connection.

Related Commands:
ELEVATIONS

(continued)

2-36 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

COORDINATES or COORDS (continued)

Command Syntax:
>--+-- COORdinates --.
| |
-- COORDS -------+-- ON ---. .-----------------.
| | / |
|-- OFF --+-- AT --*-- PIPE -----------|
| | | |
| | |-- NOZZle ---------|
| | | |
| | |-- OPEN -----------|
| | | |
| | |-- CLOSe ----------|
| | | |
| | |-- VENT -----------|
| | | |
| | |-- DRAN -----------|
| | | |
| | -- MISCellaneous --|
| | |
| ----------------------------|
| |
-- DEFault ---------------------------+-->
Querying: Q COORdinates
Q COORDS
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-37


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

CUTBACK

Function: To ensure there is sufficient length between a pulled bend and the
end of the pipe to be gripped by the bending machine and that a
pipe with a threaded end is long enough to be gripped by the
threading, machine.

Description: This command adds length to a cut pipe, where necessary, that
will be cut back after the fabrication work is finished. Additional
length will be added to cut pipes where either:
The length between a pulled bend and the end of the pipe is
insufficient to allow the bending machine to grip the pipe.
The length of a pipe that is to have a threaded end is
insufficient to be gripped by the threading machine.
The software checks the distance between the p-arrive or p-leave
of the pulled bend and the start or end of the pipe (or the length of
the pipe to be threaded). If this is found to be less than the
minimum grip length, the length of pipe required to give this
length is added to the total length of the cut pipe.
Note: If two adjacent bends are closer than the minimum grip length then a
warning message is written into the message file.
The ATEXTs 186 (CUT START) and 187 (CUT END) are output
to the remarks column of the Cutting List on the isometric, or to
the Special Req. column of the Cut Pipe List File, when
appropriate.
The minimum grip length required to handle these pipes
successfully depends on a number of factors, such as: bore size;
pipe material; type of machine; etc. To handle these varying
factors PDMS rules are used

Examples:
CUTBack 150 ON ALL BEND WITH (SPREF EQ/name)
This associates the minimum grip length with catalogue data.
CUTB 2 INCH ON ALL BENDS WITH (ABOR GE 100 AND ABOR LT 200)
This sets a minimum grip length of 2 inches for all bends in pipes with bores
between 100 and 200 mm.

(continued)

2-38 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

CUTBACK (continued)

CUTB 200 ON ALL BEND


This syntax can be used as the last rule or a catch all to ensure
that all bends have at least a 200 mm grip length.
Note: At a bend ISODRAFT will use the first rule it finds for which the
expression is TRUE, therefore the order of the rules is important.
CUTBack 175 ON THREAD
This ensures that any cut pipe with a threaded end is always at
least 175 mm in length.

Command Syntax:
>- CUTBack -+- value ON -+- ALL BEND -+- WITH - (logical expression) -.
| | | |
| | -------------------------------|
| | |
| - THREADedends -----------------------------|
| |
- NONE* ---------------------------------------------------+->

value is the minimum grip length. It may be input in mm or


inches.

logical expression may be any logical PML expression, from the


PML 1 Expression Handler. For more details refer to
expressions in the on-line help. This syntax may be used
repeatedly to build up an unlimited number of rules.

Querying: Q CUTBack Outputs a list of defined cutback


rules or none if no rules are
defined.
Q CUTBack RULE COUNT Outputs the number of cutback
rules that have been defined.
QCUTBack RULE <int> Outputs the rule identified by the
<int> number.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-39


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

CUTMARKS

Function: Draws cut marks at each corner of the overall sheet area.

Description: The CUTMARKS command draws right-angled cut marks at each


corner of the overall sheet area.. When multiple plots are defined
on the same drawing sheet, cutting marks will be superimposed.
The default is CUTMARKS OFF

Cut Marks Cut Marks

Figure 2-1 The location of cutting marks

Figure 2-2 Cutting marks on multiple plots

Examples:
CUTMarks ON
CUTMarks OFF

Command Syntax:

>--- CUTMarks ---+--- ON -----.


| |
--- OFF* ---+--->

Querying: Q CUTMARKS
Q OPTIONS

2-40 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

CUTPIPELISTFILE

Function: Outputs a cut pipe list to a file.


Description: A cut pipe report can be output as a comma separated value
(*.csv) file. The information normally output for a pipe is:
Itemcode
Item description and specification
Bore
Cut length
Calculated length (ignoring end preparation allowances etc.)
Special requirements (e.g. pulled bends, loose flanges, etc.)
Cut piece number
Pipeline reference
Batch reference, i.e. the Zone name.
End preparations
Spool number
The dimensional units and date format used in the report can be
defined by using the UNITS and DATE commands.
The format of the report file can also be customised to show only
the information you wish to see. This is done by defining a format
file, in comma separated value (*.csv) format, which reads in the
report file and lays it out to your specification. The format file
must contain the following information:
Flags to retain .csv file, create formatted report, create
appware macro
Flags to include Fortran carriage controls, paging, date
File header
File footer
Page length
Order of requested columns
Column titles
Column widths
Columns spacing
The format files can only be created using the appware by
specifying the layout in the isometric option files.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-41


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

(continued)

CUTPIPELISTFILE (continued)

Examples:
CUTPipelistfile /PIPELIST
This writes the list of cut pipes into a file named PIPELIST,
using the standard format.
CUTP /FILE1 OVER
Writes the cut pipe list to a file named FILE1, overwriting the
existing contents of FILE1.
CUTP OFF
Cut pipe reports are not produced. This is the default.
CUTP /FILE4 OVER FORMATfilename /FORMAT1
Writes the cut pipe report to a file named FILE4 using the
formatting information from file FORMAT1.

Command Syntax:
>- CUTPipelistfile -+- filename -+- OVERwrite --.
| | |
| --------------+- FORMATfilename - name -.
| | |
| -------------------------|
| |
|- OFF* ----------------------------------------------|
| |
-----------------------------------------------------+->

Querying: Q CUTPIPELISTFILE
Q OPTIONS

2-42 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

CUTTINGLIST

Function: Adds a list of cut pipe lengths to the material list.

Description: The CUTTINGLIST command adds a list of cut pipe lengths to the
material list. Each separate pipe length is always identified by:
Its cut piece number, enclosed in angled brackets; e.g. <1>.
The pipe bore.
The cut length in mm (e.g. 2219) or feet and inches (e.g.
72.5/8) depending on the type of units selected (see the
UNITS command).
For pulled bends, the length measured around the centre line of
the tube will be included on the cutting list. The RADI attribute of
the bend must be set.
A length which includes either a loose flange or a field-fit weld
will have a fitting allowance incorporated into the plotted length
(see the LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE command).
Any special requirements, such as a pulled bend; loose flange; a
field-fit weld or cutback allowance, this will be highlighted in
the remarks column.
Additionally you can add the following items to the table:
Item code for that pipe.
The end preparations for the pipe, according to the following
list:
PE Plain
BE Bevelled
TH Threaded
SC Screwed
SA Saddled end
Note: These codes are Atexts which can be changed.
Where a pipeline is split over more than one drawing, the cut pipe list on each
drawing contains only the pipe lengths for that sheet. The default is
that the numbering will follow on from the last number on the
preceding drawing. The cut piece numbering sequence can be restarted
from 1 on each continuation drawing by giving the command
CUTTinglist PERDrawing.

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-43


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

CUTTINGLIST (continued)

Examples:
CUTTinglist ON ITEM OFF
This outputs the cut piece list in the material table and switches
the Item Codes OFF.
CUTT PERD ON
This sets the numbering to per drawing.
CUTT OFF
This switches the Cuttinglist off, but does not delete the current
settings.
CUTT ON
This switches the cutting list output ON, using the current
settings. (Note that the default is Off.)
CUTT ON PERD ON ITEM ON ENDP ON
This outputs the cut piece list in the material table with both the
Item Code and End Preparation columns displayed, with
numbering set to per drawing.

Command Syntax:
>- CUTTinglist -+- OFF* -+------------------------------------.
| | |
+- ON ---| |
| | .------------<------------. |
| |/ | |
--------*- PERDrawing ------+- ON --+ |
| | | |
| - OFF -+ |
| | |
|- ITEMcodes -------+- ON --+ |
| | | |
| - OFF -+ |
| | |
|- ENDpreparations -+- ON --+ |
| | | |
| - OFF -' |
| |
------------------------------------+->

2-44 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

Querying: Q CUTTinglist
Q OPTions

DATE

Function: Specifies the format for showing the date in the drawings title
block.

Description: By default, the date is plotted according to the UK convention.


This can be changed to the European or American format, or
switched off completely.

Examples:
DATE UK Gives the United Kingdom format: 18 OCT 1991
DATE EUR Gives the European format: 18/10/1991
DATE USA Gives the United States format: 10/18/1991
DATE OFF Switches the date off

Command Syntax:

>--- DATE ---+--- UK* ----.


| |
|--- EUR ----|
| |
|--- USA ----|
| |
|--- OFF ----|
| |
------------+--->

Querying: Q DATE
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-45


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

DELETE

Function: Deletes an SKEY definition from a symbol library.

Description: There are two forms of the command, depending on whether the
SKEY is a standard one or a user-defined one.

Examples:
DELEte OLDKey keyname
Deletes a standard SKEY definition.
DELEte NEWKey keyname
Deletes a user-defined SKEY definition.

Related Commands:
SKEY

Command Syntax:
>--- DELEte ---+--- OLDKey keyname ---.
| |
--- NEWKey keyname ---+--->

DELIMITER

Function: Specifies which character ISODRAFT recognises as the itemcode


suffix delimiter.

Description: Identical components can be distinguished by having a suffix


added to their SPREFs. ISODRAFT normally removes suffixes
from itemcodes in the material list by recognising the delimiter
character which separates the suffix from the rest of the SPREF.
The default suffix code delimiter is the colon (:). A component with
an SPREF of /A1A/TEE.50X50:X will normally appear on the
material list with the itemcode TEE.50X50. (Note that the
specification name /A1A/ is also removed automatically.)

Examples:
DELIMITER AT Specifies @ symbol.
DELIMITER COLON Specifies : symbol.

2-46 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

DELIMITER PLUS Specifies + symbol.


DELIMITER DOT Specifies . symbol.
DELIMITER AND Specifies & symbol.

Command Syntax:

>--- DELImiter ---+--- ATsymbol -------.


| |
|--- COLONsymbol* ---|
| |
|--- PLUSsymbol -----|
| |
|--- DOTsymbol ------|
| |
--- ANDsymbol ------+--->

Querying: Q DELImiter
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-47


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

DETAIL

Function: Generates and plots isometric drawings and material lists.

Description: The DETAIL command followed by one or more element identifiers


processes the elements given, and produces the isometric
drawings and any other reports requested.
The default hierarchy level for plotting on a single isometric
drawing is: a Pipe from the Design database or a spool drawing
from the fabrication database. Branches or spools/fields can be
plotted individually and system isometrics, from a higher level in
the database, can also be output.
More than one pipe or spool drawing can be specified in a single
DETAIL command. The pipes can be specified individually, as a
high-level element or group, or as members of the Detail List (see
the ADD and REMOVE commands).
If a Pipe is detailed with repeatability on, the split points and
spool identifiers can be stored in the Design database. In this
case, individual sheets and spools can be added to the Detail List.
See the REPEATABILITY command.
Note that if MARK DETAIL ON is set, the DETA attribute of a pipe
is set to TRUE when it is detailed, ISODRAFT will not detail the
pipe again unless MARK IGNORE ON has been specified.
System Isometrics
Normally, ISODRAFT processes each pipeline or spool drawing
separately. Pipes, or spool drawings, which are connected can be
detailed as a complete, named, system isometric. For example:
DETAIL CE AS System Name
Note: You cannot mix design and Fabrication database elements in the same system
isometric.
The system name is plotted, by default, in the pipeline reference
box in the bottom right-hand corner of the drawing. The
individual pipe names, along with their material and other
specifications, are plotted at the change point.
If any specification is unchanged throughout the system, it will be
output in the title block in the same way as a normal isometric. If
a system consists of only one pipe, its name will be added to the
title block.
(continued)

2-48 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

DETAIL (continued)

The material control file and material list will be produced for the
whole system isometric. It is not possible to produce a breakdown
of materials for an individual pipeline, nor will the material files
include any pipeline header information.
Note: No information is written to the support file for a system
isometric.
Equipment Trims
Although unconnected items cannot be drawn automatically as
part of a system isometric, vessel or equipment trim drawings
comprising a drawing frame, user-positioned text and a material
list can be produced for material take off using the DETAIL AS
EQUIPMENT option. The graphical part of the drawing can then
be added separately, e.g. as an underlay plot generated in
DRAFT.
Groups of components such as blanking flanges, level gauges,
relief valves, etc., can be modelled on the basis of one Pipe per
Nozzle, or per group of Nozzles if connected (such as a level gauge
piped between two Nozzles). Disconnected branches in the same
pipe on different nozzles cannot be grouped. The collection of
pipes can then be detailed as equipment trim.
In the material list, equipment trim items will be grouped under
headings of the form
NOZZLE REF - A.
By default, item numbering for equipment trims in the material
list will start at 1 for each Nozzle. To concatenate the lists so that
the numbering is continuous throughout the sequence of Nozzles,
use the EQUIPMENTNUMBERING command.
A split ATTA (that is, an ATTY set to SSSS) positioned at the Tail
of an equipment trim Branch will cause a multiple sheet drawing
to be produced. Such an ATTA should be positioned so that the
split comes between two Nozzle groupings.
It is not possible to obtain a cut pipe list on an equipment trim
isometric. Cut pipe lists have pointers to individual lengths on the
drawing and so, since equipment trim isometrics are for material
take off only (with no drawing), a cut pipe list would not be
meaningful.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-49


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

DETAIL (continued)

Examples:
DETAIL /SITE2-1 /PIPE-2-2-1
Plots named elements only.
DETAIL ALLPlots the current Detail List.
DETAIL /SITE2-1 /SITE2-2 AS REFINER
Plots the two sites as a single system iso with the drawing title
REFINER.
DETAIL SHEETN 2 /PIPE-2
Replots sheet 2 of PIPE-2. Note that if a dimension is continued
on another sheet, the other sheet will be replotted as well, so that
the dimensioning information is correct.
DETAIL SHEETN SING /PIPE2
Replots the iso for /PIPE-2 on a single sheet
DETAIL /SPLDRG-2
Plots spool drawing 2 of the fabrication database.

Related Commands:
ADD CHECK REMOVE SPOOLNUMBERS

Command Syntax:
.-------------------------------------------.
/ |
>- DETail -*- <gid> -------------------------------------|
| |
|- ALL ---------------------------------------|
| |
|- SHEETNumber -+- integer -. |
| | | |
| - SINGle --+-------. |
| | |
- SPOOl -+- integer -+-OF integer -| |
| | | |
| -------------| |
| | |
- text ------------------+- <gid> -+- AS -- text -----.
| | |
---------+- EQUIpment text -|->

Note: The Spool branch in this syntax diagram refers only to spools from the Design
database, not Spool Drawings from the SPOOLER module, which you plot using the
normal DETAIL command.
(continued)

2-50 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

DETAIL (continued)

Restrictions: The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in a DETAIL


command is 100.
A maximum of 20 DETAIL commands are allowed for a single pipe
(sheets or spools). The maximum number of items for any single
pipe (sheets or spools) is 20. You can only add sheet and spools for
a Pipe which has previously been detailed with Repeatability on,
so that split points and spool identifiers have been stored in the
Design database. See the REPEATABILITY command. Normal
pipes can be detailed alongside replots.

Querying: Q DEtaillist Shows the current content of the Draw


List.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-51


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

DIMDIST

Function: Specifies distance between dimensioning lines and pipe/


component centrelines on the isometric plot (standout distance).
Normally used to avoid overplotting lines on a complex isometric.
Description: The default standout distances are: string dimensions 11mm;
overall dimensions 16mm; support dimensions 6mm. Note that
these standout values may not be set to the same value. Also note
that the skewbox standout distances for dimension lines cannot be
set to these values and vice versa.
Examples:
DIMDIST STRING 15
Sets standout distance for string/composite dimensions to 15mm.
DIMDIST STRING 0.5 INCH
Sets standout distance to 0.5 inch.
DIMDIST SUPPORTS 10
Sets support dimensioning standout distance to 10mm.
DIMDIST OVERALL 12
Sets overall dimensioning standout distance to 12mm.

Related Commands:
DIMENSIONS SUPPORT SKEWBOX

Command Syntax:

>--- DIMDist ---+--- STRING* ----.


| |
|--- OVERall ---|
| |
--- SUPPorts ---+--- value -----.
| |
`--- DEFAULT ---+--->
where value is the standout distance.

2-52 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

Querying: Q DIMDist
Q OPTions

DIMENSIONS

Function: Specifies dimensioning style.

Description: The basic options for detailed dimensioning are either string or
composite dimensions.
String dimensioning gives the maximum amount of detail, since it
shows both the lengths of individual components and their
relative positions. For assembly purposes (fabrication and
erection) string dimensioning often gives more detail than is
strictly necessary and composite dimensioning can be specified.
String dimensions, which are plotted by default, are measured
sequentially from each relevant point to the next. The relevant
points are:
The start or end of a branch.
Changes of direction (bends, elbows, etc).
Component connection points (flanges, welds, screwed and
compression joints etc, excluding gaskets).
Composite dimensions ignore dimensions over which the
fabricator has no control, particularly the sizes of individual
components. Components which are directly connected to the each
other are therefore dimensioned as though they constitute a
single composite item.
Only non-flanged components, that is, those with welded, screwed
or compression fittings, are considered as connected when
calculating composite dimensions. Flanges are always treated as
breaks in the pipeline and dimensioned separately.
Fittings which are attached to pipe only at one end are treated as
composite with the fitting at the other end. Fittings which are
attached to pipe at both ends are dimensioned to the arrive p-
point, with two exceptions:
Reducers are dimensioned to the larger end;
Tees are dimensioned to the centreline of the off branch.
Composite dimensions are always broken at a Tee or Olet
intersection point.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-53


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

(continued)

2-54 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

DIMENSIONS (continued)

You can display overall dimensions in addition to string or


composite dimensions. The default standout for overall
dimensions is 16mm. Overall dimensions are taken:
From the start of a branch to the first change of direction
From each change of direction to the next
From the last change of direction to the end of a branch
From the start of a falling section skew-box to the end of the
skew-box.
Between Branch connections.

~ ~

~ ~
(a) String dimensions (b) Composite dimensions

~
(c) Overall dimensions

Figure 2-3 Dimensioning Methods

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-55


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

DIMENSIONS (continued)

Bore sizes will be marked where any confusion might otherwise


arise; e.g. at reducers, reducing fittings, tees, crosses, etc.
You can also specify:
Whether or not overall dimensions cross Branch connections;
Dimensioning to Valve centrelines.
By default, support/hanger dimensions are on the same side as
string dimensions, but they can be on the opposite side. The
default standout for support/hanger dimensions is 6mm.
The default settings are:
String dimensioning on (and, therefore, composite
dimensioning off);
Overall dimensioning off;
Support dimensioning on;
Valve centreline dimensioning off;
Support/hanger dimensions shown alongside other pipeline
dimensions.

Examples:
DIME ON
Produces isometrics which are fully annotated in string format,
with both piping and support dimensions. This is the default
setting.
DIME OFF
Produces isometrics with no dimensions plotted.
DIME COMP ON
Produces isometrics with composite dimensions over connected
fittings.
DIME COMP OFF
Produces isometrics with string format dimensions, assuming
that dimensioning is still on.
DIME OVER ON
Produces isometrics with overall dimensions on (independent of
current setting of string/composite options).
DIME OVER CEN
Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to Valve centrelines
and Branch connections (in addition to string dimensions).
(continued)

2-56 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

DIMENSIONS (continued)

DIME OVER CENT ONLY


Produces isometrics with overall centreline dimensions only.
DIME OVER ON STOP
Produces isometrics with overall dimensions stopping at branch
connections.
DIME OVER ON ACR
Produces isometrics with overall dimensions across branch
connections.
DIME OVER CENT STOP
Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to valve centrelines,
stopping at branch connections.
DIME OVER CENT ACR
Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to valve centrelines
and across branch connections.
DIME OVER CRIT
Produces isometrics with overall dimensions to critical
components.
DIME SUPP
Produces isometrics with support dimensions only.
DIME DEFAULT
Resets the dimensioning style to its default state.
Note that standout distances may not be set to the same value.

Related Commands:
DIMDIST SUPPORT TRUNCATE

Restrictions: Overall dimensioning can be specified in addition to string or


composite dimensioning, but an overall dimension will not be
shown if it is the same as a string or composite dimension.
Instruments Tees cannot be included within overall dimensions.
When a Tee or Olet is encountered with its arrive p-point in a
branch leg, an overall dimension may not be given for the main
branch.

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-57


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

DIMENSIONS (continued)

Command Syntax:
>- DIMEnsions -+- ON -----------------------------------------------------------.
| |
|- OFF ----------------------------------------------------------|
| |
|- SUPport ------------------------------------------------------|
| |
|- DEFault ------------------------------------------------------|
| |
|- COMPosite -+- ON --. |
| | | |
| - OFF -+------------------------------------------|
| |
|- OVERall -+- ON ------------------. |
| | | |
| |- CENTreline -+- ONLY -| |
| | | | |
| | --------+- STOPping -. |
| | | | |
| | |- ACRoss ---| |
| | | | |
| | ------------+- BRANch ------|
| | | |
| | |- CONNections -|
| | | |
| | ---------------|
| | |
| |- CRITical -+- ONLY -. |
| | | | |
| | --------+------------------------------|
| | |
| - OFF ----------------------------------------------|
| |
- HANGers -+- OPPosite --. |
| | |
- ALONgside -+- STRings ----------------------------+->

Querying: Q DIMEnsions
Q OPTions

2-58 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

DISTANCES

Function: Allows you to specify the units to be used for input of lengths and
distances.

Description: The default units for the input of dimensions (i.e. the units which
are assumed if you enter a dimension simply as a value) are
normally derived from the Catalogue. You can change the default
units independently for input of pipe bores and/or distances along
pipelines or across components by using the related DISTANCES
and BORES commands.
Note that the UNITS command is used to set output units.
The current default units may be overridden for any specific item
of input data by giving the units explicitly. For example: 5 mm.

Examples:
MM DISTANCES
Input lengths and distances assumed to be in mm unless
otherwise specified.
INCH DISTANCES
Input lengths and distances assumed to be in inches unless
otherwise specified.
FINCH DISTANCES
Input lengths and distances assumed to be in feet and inches
unless otherwise specified
(e.g. 56 represents 5ft 6in).

Related Commands:
BORES

Command Syntax:

>---+--- MILlimetre ---.


| |
|--- MM -----------|
| |
|--- FInch --------|
| |
--- INch ---------+--- BOres -------.
| |
--- DIstances ---+--->

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-59


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

Querying: Q UNIts

DTEXTS

Function: Controls the material description part of item descriptions.

Description: A complete item description in a material list consists of the


geometric description (derived from the attributes of a DTEXT
element) and the material description (derived from the attributes
of an MTEXT element).
The text in MTEXT and DTEXT elements is defined in
PARAGON by setting the attributes of MTEXT and DTEXT to the
text required. Both elements have three attributes which can
contain text:
The three attributes of DTEXT are RTEXT, STEXT and
TTEXT;
The three attributes of MTEXT are XTEXT, YTEXT and
ZTEXT.
The default attributes whose text will be displayed on the
material list are RTEXT and XTEXT. If the other attributes have
been set in the Design database, you can choose to display the
STEXT or TTEXT using the DTEXT command, and the YTEXT or
ZTEXT using the MTEXT command.
The DTEXTS IGNORE command allows you to suppress the
geometric description completely.
Using different attributes can be used, for example, to store
descriptions in different languages.

Examples:
DTEXts Stext
Sets the description to the text held in the STEXT attribute.
DTEXts Ttext
Sets the description to the text held in the TTEXT attribute.
DTEXts Rtext
Sets the description to the text held in the XTEXT attribute. This
is the default.

Related Commands:
MATERIALLIST MTEXTS

2-60 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

(continued)

DTEXTS (continued)

Command Syntax:

>--- DTEXts ---+--- Rtext* ---.


| |
|--- Stext ----|
| |
|--- Ttext ----|
| |
--- IGNORE ---+--->

Querying: Q DTEXT
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-61


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ELEVATION

Function: Specifies whether or not elevation coordinates are to be shown on


isometrics.

Description: By default, elevations are shown on isometrics at all intersection


points where there is a change of elevation. You can change this
as shown in the following examples.

Examples:
ELEVation VERTIcal
Outputs elevations only on vertical sections of pipe (i.e. linear
dimensions are omitted).
ELEVation VERTical AND DIMEnsions
Outputs both elevations and dimensions on vertical sections of
pipe.
ELEVation INTERsections
Resets the default condition so that elevations are only shown at
intersection points where there is a change of elevation, and
dimensions are shown on vertical sections of Pipe.

Related Commands:
COORDINATES COORDS DIMENSIONS

Command Syntax:

>-- ELEVation --+-- INTERsections* ----------------------------.


| |
-- VERTical ------+-- AND --. |
| | |
|----------+-- DIMEnsions --|
| |
---------------------------+-->

2-62 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

Querying: Q ELEVation
Q OPTions

EQUIPMENTNUMBERING

Function: Controls numbering of items in the material list for an equipment


trim isometric.

Description: Item numbering in the material list can start at 1 for each Nozzle,
which is the default, or the numbering can be sequential for all
Nozzles.

Examples:
EQUIPMENTN LIST
Numbering is continuous through the sequence of Nozzles.
EQUIPMENTN NOZZ
Resets to the default, with each Nozzle having its own separate
numbering sequence.

Command Syntax:

>--- EQUIPMENTNumbering ---+--- NOZZle* ---.


| |
--- LIST ------+--->

Querying: Q EQUIPMENTNumbering
(note minimum abbreviation for querying)
Q OPTIONS

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-63


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

FALLINGLINES

Function: Defines the maximum rate of fall allowed in a pipeline before it is


shown as a skew on the isometric plot.

Description: Amounts of fall less than the current fall limit are shown by a
wedge-shaped symbol on the pipe, together with a note giving the
rate of fall. The wedge-shaped symbols are known as fall arrows.
Amounts of fall greater than the current limit are shown as boxed
skews. You can change the limit, and the units in which it is
expressed.

EL +25000 EL +1200

FALL 1_
EL +1130

EL +24600

Falling line shown as skew Falling line shown by fall arrow

Figure 2-4 Different ways of showing falling lines.


The default accuracy to which ISODRAFT will report the fall is as
follows:
Degrees to the nearest half degree
Ratio to the nearest 1 up to 30; to the nearest 5 above 30
Percentage to the nearest 1%
Grads to the nearest half grad
Metric inclination to the nearest 10mm per metre
Imperial inclination to the nearest 1/16 per foot
Note that if the slope is less than 1:500 (or its equivalent in
degrees, etc) the fall note will not be output.

(continued)

2-64 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

FALLINGLINES (continued)

You can specify different accuracy values for reporting the fall
using the ACCURACYLEVEL value command (where value can be
zero, 1 or 2). The accuracies you can specify are:
value (for each representation) 0 1 2
degrees default 0.1 0.01
ratio default 1 always 1 always
percentage default 0.1 0.01
grads default 0.1 0.01
metric default 1mm/m 0.1mm/m
imperial default 1/ /10
16
1/ /100
16

If you set an accuracy level and then wish to go back to the


default settings, you must give an appropriate ACCURACYLEVEL
command with a value of zero.
If the fall units are specified but the value of the fall limit is
omitted, the following default values will be used. These
correspond to approximately the same slope:
FALL DEG will default to FALL DEG 5 i.e. 5 degrees
FALL RAT will default to FALL RAT 11 i.e. a ratio of 1:11
FALL PER will default to FALL PER 9 i.e. a slope of 9%
FALL GRA will default to FALL GRA 5 i.e. 5 grads
FALL MET will default to FALL MET 80 i.e. 80 mm per metre
FALL IMP will default to FALL IMP 1 i.e. 1/16 inch per foot
The overall default setting, if no fall units or limit are specified, is
FALL DEG 5.
Where a falling section includes an in-line component, such as a
Valve or Reducer, the FALL message will appear only once,
against the first section of the slope. Where a falling section
incorporates a Tee, the FALL message will be shown twice, on
both sides of the Tee.

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-65


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

FALLINGLINES (continued)

3 X 3" NS

EL +1200
3 X 3" NS FALL 1_
EL +1163
FALL 1_

2010

EL +1130 600

203

1093

Figure 2-5 Falls in sections of pipe containing components.

Examples:
FALL RATIO 20 Sets fall limit to 1:20.
FALL RATIO Resets fall limit to ratio default of 1:11.
FALL PERCENT 2 Sets fall limit to 2%.
FALL PERCENT Resets fall limit to percentage default of 9%.
FALL OFF All falls shown as boxed skews; fall symbol
not used at all.
FALL 1.4 DEG Sets fall limit to 1.5 degrees.
FALL RAT 1:40 Sets fall limit to 1:40.
FALL PER 2.7% Sets fall limit to 3% (to nearest per cent).
FALL GRAD 1.6 Sets fall limit to 1.5 grad.
FALL MET 30 Sets fall limit to a metric incline of 30mm/m.
FALL IMP 5/16 Sets fall limit to an imperial incline of 5/16 per
ft.
FALL MET 30 ACC 1
Sets fall limit to a metric incline of 30mm/m
with a reporting accuracy of 1mm per metre.

(continued)

2-66 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

FALLINGLINES (continued)

Related Commands:
ANGLEACCURACY FALLSKEWS SKEWBOX ZEROLENGTHSKEWS

Command Syntax:

>- FALLinglines -+- DEG --------.


| |
|- RATio ------|
| |
|- PERcentage -|
| |
|- GRAds ------|
| |
|- IMPerial ---|
| |
|- METric -----+- value -.
| | |
| | |- ACCuracylevel value -.
| | | |
| ---------+-----------------------|
| |
- OFF ------------------------------------------+->

Querying: Q FALLinglines
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-67


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

FALLSKEWS

Function: Controls how dimensioning boxes for skewed and falling pipelines
are shown.

Description: Dimensioning boxes for skewed and falling pipelines are by


default shown by 3D skewboxes, that is boxes showing the
horizontal skew and the fall. Skewed and falling pipelines with
rates of fall less than the current fall (set by the FALLINGLINES
command) can be shown as a 2D skewbox for the horizontal skew
and a fall indicator showing the amount of fall.
Skewboxes can be suppressed completely for branches containing
less than a specified number of components. Skew box suppres-
sion applies only until a change of direction is encountered.

Examples:
FALLSkews THREEDbox ON
Displays skewed and falling lines with 3D boxes. This is the
default.
FALLSkews TWODbox ON
Displays skewed and falling lines with 2D boxes for the horizontal
skew and a FALL indicator giving the amount of fall.
FALLSkews TWODbox OFF 4
Displays skews as 2D boxes (with FALL indicators), but omits
boxes on branch legs which have four or less components. Note:
This component count excludes gaskets but includes each length
of implied tubing. The number of components must be between 1
and 50 inclusive.

Related Commands:
FALLINGLINES OVERALLSKEWS SKEWBOX ZEROLENGTHSKEWS

Command Syntax:

>--- FALLSkews ---+--- THREEDbox ---.


| |
--- TWODbox -----+--- ON --------------.
| |
|--- OFF --- value ---|
| |
---------------------+--->

2-68 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

FILE

Function: Specifies the name of a plot file to which ISODRAFTs isometric


drawing output is to be sent. The FILE command can also be used
to output a file in dxf format (if you needed to transfer the plot to
another program, for example). If Kanji output is required, the
FILE command also allows you to specify the dxf file as SHIFTJIS
format (mostly used on IBM PCs) or EUC format (used on most
other machines). You can produce dxf files either instead of the
plot file, or as well as the plot file.

Details of outputting .dxf format files to MicroStation are given in


Appendix D.

Description: The FILE command specifies the name of the plot file for
ISODRAFT output. ISODRAFT adds a three-digit number,
jumping over any numbers which already exist. If DXF output is
requested, the suffix .dxf will be added after the number. Note
that the numbering ignores the .dxf suffix. For example, if a file
named /PLOT001 exists, the next file created will be /PLOT002 or
/PLOT002.dxf.
If the same file command is used to produce a plot file and DXF
file, they will both have the same numeric suffix. For example, if
the last plot file was /PLOT004 and the last DXF file was
/PLOT002.dxf, and a plot file and DXF file are both required for
the next DETAIL command, the output will be /PLOT005 and
/PLOT005.dxf.
By default, each DETAIL command will produce one plot file. If
several pipes are specified in a DETAIL command, you can specify
that each plot will be in a separate file.
If a pipe is too complicated to be shown on one plot, or if you have
specified that the pipe should be split over more than one sheet,
separate plot files can be produced. If you want the plot file to
contain more than one drawing you can specify a multiple plot
file, and in this case you can also specify the length of paper
available. ISODRAFT will automatically create a new multiple
plot file when the paper length has been exceeded.
The PDMS limitation on plotting size is 3275mm square and this
cannot be exceeded in either single or multiple file mode.

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-69


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

FILE (continued)

Examples:
FILE /P250-BDF
Specifies the filename /P250-BDF. Plot files will be named /P250-
BDF001, /P250-BDF002, etc.
FILE AND DXF /P250-BDF
Specifies the filename /P250-BDF for both the plot file and the dxf
file.
FILE DXF EUC /P250-BDF
Specifies that the plot file will be in DXF EUC format. The suffix
.dxf is added to the filename automatically. Note that on VAX,
this will override the normal VAX filename extension.
FILE /PLOT MULT
Specifies that the file named /PLOT can contain multiple plots.
This is the default.
FILE /PLOT MULT 2000
Specifies that the file named /PLOT can contain multiple plots,
and gives the maximum length of paper.

Command Syntax:
>- FILE -+- AND -.
| |
+-------+- DXF -.
| | |
| '-------+- SHIFTjis -.
| | |
| +- EUC ------|
| | |
| ------------|
| |
----------------------------+- filename -+- SINGle --------------.
| |
|-- MULTIple -+- value -|
| | |
| ---------|
| |
| |
-----------------------+->

where value is the maximum length of the plotters paper roll in millimetres.

Querying: Q OUTPUT
Q OPTIONS

2-70 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

FLOWARROWS

Function: Allows flow arrows to be shown on isometric plots.

Description: Flow arrows are normally shown for inline components. Inline
flow arrows can also be plotted in any length of tube if an
attachment point (ATTA) with its ATTY attribute set to FLOW
has been created in the DESIGN module. You can also instruct
ISODRAFT to include automatic flow arrows by using the
AUTOMATIC command. Automatic flow arrows are output for
each branch, and at each multi-way component, provided that a
length of implied tube is available to take the arrow. The
automatic flow arrows option will also output any FLOW ATTAs.
By default, the inline flow arrow option is set to off, so that flow
arrows for tube are not normally shown.
Each type can be plotted independently, and the inline flow
arrows can be scaled.
By default the arrows point in the direction HEAD to TAIL; i.e.
FORWARD. They can be reversed by changing the branch FLOW
attribute to BACKWARD.

Examples:
FLOWarrows ON
Flow arrows will be plotted for components.
FLOWarrows OFF
Flow arrows will not be plotted for components.
FLOWarrows INline ON
Flow arrows will be plotted for Flow ATTAs in tube.
FLOWarrows INline OFF
Flow arrows will not be plotted for Flow ATTAs in tube.
FLOWarrows INline SCAle 10
Inline flow arrows will be scaled by a factor of 10. The default
scale factor is 8. The scale must be an integer between 5 and 15
inclusive.
FLOWarrows INline SCAle 10 AUTO
Inline flow arrows will be scaled by a factor of 10 and added
automatically. The default scale factor is 8. The scale must be an
integer between 5 and 15 inclusive.

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-71


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

FLOWARROWS (continued)

Command Syntax:

.---------------------<----------------------.
/ |
>- FLOWarrows --+------------+-- ON* --------------------------|
| | |
| -- OFF --------------------------|
| |
-- INline --+-- ON ------------. |
| | |
|-- SCAle-integer--+- AUTOmatic --|
| | |
| --------------|
| |
-- OFF* -------------------------+-->

Querying: Q FLOWarrows
Q OPTions

FRAME

Function: Specifies whether or not drawing frame lines and text are to be
drawn.

Description: By default, ISODRAFT plots a frame around the complete


drawing within the predefined margins, together with separating
lines between the different areas. Frame text and line summary
symbols are also plotted.
The FRAME command allows you to switch these features off or
on.

Related Commands:
CUTMARKS MARGIN

Command Syntax:

>--- FRAMe ---+--- ON* ---.


| |
--- OFF ---+--->

2-72 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

Querying: Q FRAMe
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-73


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

INSTALL SETUP

Function: Produces the screen layout stored in a file created by the


RECREATE command.

Description: On workstations, you can use the RECREATE command to save


the screen layout, which can then be read in again using the
INSTALL SETUP command.

Examples:
RECReate /DISP
Saves the screen display in a file named /DISP.
INSTALL SETUP /DISP
Restores the screen display stored in the file /DISP.

Related Commands:
RECREATE

Command Syntax:

>--- INSTALL SETUP filename --->

2-74 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

INSTNAME

Function: Controls two options relating to the display of Instruments:


Defines whether SPREFs or PDMS names are to be used as
itemcodes for instruments in the material list.
Allows you to identify instruments on the isometric plot by
tagging them with their names enclosed in circles (balloons).

Description: By default, an instrument is identified in the material list by


having its SPREF as its itemcode. You can specify instead that
the instruments name will be appended to its description,
because an instrument reference may require more characters
than the itemcode format permits. In this case the itemcode
column will be left blank.
When an instrument is referenced by name, the name can be
displayed in a circular balloon next to the plotted symbol on the
isometric. By default, instruments are not tagged with their
names in balloons, even if they are identified by name in the
material list. The size of the balloon is given by specifying the
maximum number of characters per line of text in the balloon.

Examples:
INSTN NAME
Instruments identified in material list by names appended to
descriptions. The itemcode column is left blank (default).
INSTN SPREF
Instruments identified in material list by using SPREFs as
itemcodes.
INSTN NAME WITH BALL OFF
Instruments identified in material list by name, but without
tagging with name balloons on plot.
INSTN NAME WITH BALLOONS SIZE 4
Identifies all instrument symbols on the isometric with balloons
containing the instrument names in a 4-characters-per-line
format.

Related Commands:
TAGGING

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-75


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

INSTNAME (continued)

Command Syntax:

>- INSTName -+- NAMe* -+- WITH -.


| | |
| |--------+- BALLoons -+- SIZE - integer -.
| | | |
| | - OFF ------------|
| | |
| ----------------------------------------|
| |
- SPRef ------------------------------------------+->

Querying: Q INSTNAME
Q OPTions

2-76 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

INSULATIONCONTROL

Function: Specifies whether or not insulation is to be plotted.

Description: Any piping component which has its ISPEC attribute set may be
shown insulated. The start and end points of insulated
components will be shown on the isometric.
Insulation and tracing can be shown:
On tubing only
On tubing and pipe components
The name of the insulation and/or tracing specification will be
shown in the title block.

Examples:
INSU ON Show insulation on the tube only, not on the pipe
INSU TUBE components.
INSU ALL Show insulation on both tube and components.
INSU OFF Suppress the display of insulation.
The default is INSULATIONCONTROL TUBE.

Related Commands:
TRACINGCONTROL

Command Syntax:

>------ INSUlationcontrol ----+---- ON* ----.


| |
|---- TUBE ---|
| |
|---- ALL ----|
| |
---- OFF ----+--->

Querying: Q INSUlationcontrol
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-77


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ISO

Function: Defines the view direction to be used for generating the isometric
plot.

Description: The ISO command defines which of the four standard isometric
viewing directions will be used for the isometric plot. An arrow is
placed on the plot to show north.
The BOX option will plot a box round the north arrow.
The default view direction is ISO 3 (i.e. North at the top left-hand
corner of the drawing).
Examples:
ISO 1 North at bottom right-hand corner
ISO 2 North at top right-hand corner
ISO 3 * North at top left-hand corner
ISO 4 North at bottom left-hand corner
ISO 4 BOX North at bottom left-hand corner, with a box round
the arrow
Command Syntax:

>--- ISO --- value ---+-----------.


| |
--- BOX ---+--->
where value is 1, 2, 3 or 4.

Querying: Q ISO
Q OPTions

2-78 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ISOTYPE

Function: Defines whether the isometric will show fabrication information,


erection information, or both.

Description: The ISOTYPE command specifies whether the information on the


drawing is intended for:
In-shop fabrication and on-site erection
In-shop fabrication
On-site erection
In-shop fabrication of pipe spools
A combined fabrication-erection isometric is a fully dimensioned
and annotated isometric drawing with a material list specifying
all piping components, bolts etc. This is the default.
A fabrication-only isometric is similar to the combined format
except that the following information is omitted:
The coordinates of plant locations
Erection materials
CONNected TO and CONTinued ON comments at pipeline
ends
The erection-only isometric is similar to the combined format
except that all fabrication materials, apart from loose flanges, are
omitted from the materials list .
A spool isometric only shows fabrication information. Loose
flanges will be included on spools, with the note tack weld only, if
they have a SHOP attribute set to TRUE.
ISODRAFT automatically allocates spool break points at flanges
or flanged components, field welds and erection materials, that is
items with their SHOP flag set to FALSE.
All components, including Tube, must have their SHOP attributes
set to TRUE if spool break points are to be correctly allocated.
(The default setting for tube is FALSE, which would cause lengths
of implied tube to be omitted when ISODRAFT calculates spool
dimensions.)

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-79


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ISOTYPE (continued)

A spool number, automatically allocated by ISODRAFT, will be


plotted after the pipeline reference in the title block of each
drawing. For example,
100-A-8 SPL[1].
A separate isometric drawing will be produced for each pipe spool.
Sheets with Blank Drawing Areas. Any type of the isometric can
be produced with the actual drawing area left blank, that is, only
the material list will be plotted.
If ISOTYPE NONE is specified, no plot will be produced. You must
specify output to text files, such as a material list, to get any
output at all.

Command Syntax:

>-- ISOType --+-- COMBined* --+-- ERECtion ------.


| | |
| |-- FABrication ---|
| | |
| ------------------|
| |
|-- ERECtion --+-- FABrication ----|
| | |
| -------------------|
| |
|-- FABrication -------------------|
| |
|-- SPOOl -------------------------+-- NOPicture ---.
| | |
| ----------------|
| |
--- NONe ------------------------------------------+->

Querying: Q ISOType
Q OPTions

2-80 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ITEMCODE (1)

Function: Allows you to label certain types of fitting with their itemcodes on
the isometric drawing.

Description: By default, itemcodes for piping components are shown only in the
material list.
For in-line fittings of generic types INST, VALV, FILT, PCOM,
TRAP or VENT, you can specify that itemcodes are also shown
against the corresponding component symbols on the isometric
plot.
You can also specify that itemcodes are not to be shown at all.

Examples:
ITEM INST TRAP ON
Itemcodes for Instruments and Traps shown against plotted
symbols and in material list; codes for all other component types
shown in material list only.
ITEM TRAP VENT OFF
Itemcodes for Traps and Vents not shown at all; codes for all other
component types shown in material list only.
ITEM ALL ON
Itemcodes for all valid component types shown against plotted
symbols and in material list.
ITEM ALL DEFAULT
Itemcodes for all types of component shown in material list only.
ITEM OFF Itemcodes are shown only in the material list

Related Commands:
TAGGING

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-81


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ITEMCODE (1) (continued)

Command Syntax:

.--------<--------.
/ |
>--- ITEMcode ---*--- fittingtype ---|
| |
--- ALL -----------+--- ON --------.
| |
|--- OFF* ------|
| |
--- DEFault ---+--->
where fittingtype is any of INST, VALV, FILT, PCOM, TRAP, or
VENT.

Querying: Q ITEMCODE
Q OPTions

2-82 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ITEMCODE (2)

Function: Specifies whether or not specification names are to be included in


material list itemcodes, and whether items which have the same
itemcode except for the specification name and suffix are treated
as the same item.

Description: By default, itemcodes shown in the material list do not include


the name of the Specification from which the material data has
been extracted. This is known as a short itemcode. The
ITEMCODE LENGTH command allows you to use the full SPCOM,
which includes the SPEC name but excludes the suffix, as the
itemcode.
By default, ISODRAFT removes any itemcode suffixes before
comparing itemcodes for totalling in the material list. The
SEPARATE option allows itemcodes to be compared before the
specification name and suffix are removed, thus allowing
itemcodes to be listed separately with different descriptions.
You can set up multiple itemcodes for elements in the Design
database by creating user-defined attributes (UDAs) for the
SPCOM of the element. For bolts, the UDAs are created as
attributes of a DTAB element. You can then use the ITEMCODE
command to specify that the itemcode should be taken from a
UDA instead of from the SPCOM.

Examples:
ITEMCODE LENGTH LONG
Itemcodes to include SPEC name.
ITEMCODE LENGTH SHORT
Itemcodes to exclude SPEC name.
ITEMCODE TOTAL
Itemcodes which are the same except for the specification name
and suffix are totalled.
ITEMCODE SEPARATE
Itemcodes which are the same except for the specification name
and suffix are listed separately.
ITEMCODE FROM :ABC
Itemcodes to be taken from the UDA named :ABC. The UDA must
exist for SPCOMs.
ITEMCODE FROM SPREF
Itemcodes to be taken from the SPCOM.
(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-83


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ITEMCODE (2) (continued)

Related Commands:
MATERIALLIST DELIMITER

Command Syntax:

>-- ITEMcode --+----------------------.


| |
-- FROM --+--SPREF* --+- LENGth --+-- LONG ----.
| | | |
| | -- SHORT* --|
| | |
| |-- TOTal* ----. |
| | | |
| |-- SEParate --+---------|
| | |
| ------------------------|
| |
-- :udaname ------------------------+-->

Querying: Q ITEMCODE
Q ITEMCODE LENGTH
Q OPTions

2-84 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

JOINTNUMBERS

Function: Numbering joints in Spool Drawings on an isometric.

Description: By default SPOOLER automatically generates numbers for every


joint in a Spool Drawing. These numbers can be output on an
isometric by switching JOINTNumbers ON.
Note: This function has no effect when plotting isometrics from
the Design database.
The joints are sequentially numbered from one end of the Spool
Drawing, with each number being given a prefix indicating the
type of joint. The default prefixes are:
F Flange
S Screwed
C Compression
Note: The F, S & C codes are ATexts, and can be changed.
The numbers are displayed in a diamond, with an arrow pointing
to the joint. If the total number of characters (prefix + number) is
greater than 3, the number is displayed in angled brackets; e.g.
<FL124>.

Examples:
JOINTN ON Switches joint numbering on.
JOINTN OFFSwitches joint numbering off.

Related Commands:
PBENDNUMBERS WELDNUMBERS

Syntax Graph:

>--- JOINTNumbers ---+--- ON ----.


| |
--- OFF ---+--->

Querying: Q JOINTNumbers

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-85


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

KEYS

Function: Allows components with specified SKEYS to be treated like


instruments.

Description: Component types that can be tagged, that is types that can have
their names plotted automatically on the isometric drawing, can
be treated like instruments. This means that:
If INSTRUMENT SPREF is set, the SPREF will be used as the
itemcode.
If INSTRUMENT NAME is set, the itemcode column will be left
blank and the name will be appended to the description.
If INSTRUMENT NAME WITH BALLOONS is set, the name will
be output in a balloon on the isometric.
The types that can be tagged are:
INST VALV FILTER PCOM
TRAP VENT VTWA VFWA

To treat a component type as an instrument, give each specific


component type a key number, and then relate the key number to
the symbol key (SKEY) by the KEYS command.
See the TAG command for more information about tagging.

Examples:
KEYS 1 VVFL
Any valve with the symbol key VVFL, and which has a name, will
have its name appended to its description and the itemcode
column left blank. If a valve with the symbol key VVFL is not
named, its SPREF will be output as its itemcode in the normal
way.
KEYS 1
Remove the component from the key number list by quoting its
number only.

(continued)

2-86 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

KEYS (continued)

Command Syntax:

>--- KEYS --- keynumber --+--- skey ---.


| |
--------------+--->
where keynumber is the key number (which must be in the range
1 to 20) and skey is the symbol key (SKEY attribute).

Querying: Q OPTIONS
Q KEYS List the key numbers currently set.
Q KEYS keynumber List the SKEY associated with the
number.

LEGLENGTH

Function: Allows you to specify the plotted leg length of elbows, tees and
crosses

Description: By default, the plotted leg length of Elbows, Tees and Crosses is
9mm. If necessary you can change this value. The minimum leg
length allowed is 6mm. If you specify a smaller value than this,
ISODRAFT will give the message
Leglength set to minimum value of 6mm

Examples:
LEGLength 12

Command Syntax:

>--- LEGLength --- <uval> --->

Querying: Q LEGLENGTH
Q OPTIONS

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-87


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

LINETHICKNESS

Function: Allows you to control (optionally) the thickness of line used to


represent piping.

Description: This command allows you to specify a line thickness (from 1 to 10)
to represent piping on the isometric. A default value (3) is used if
you do not specify a thickness.

Examples:
LINETHICKNESS 8
Specifies a line thickness of 8 to be used to represent piping.

Command Syntax:

>--- LINEthickness --- <uval> --->

Querying: Q LINEthickness
Q OPTions

2-88 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE

Function: Allows you to specify an additional length of tube on cut tube to


compensate for field-fitted welds and loose flanges, where the
ALLO attribute has not been set.

Description: If a cut pipe list has been specified using the CUTPIPELIST
command, ISODRAFT automatically includes a site fitting
allowance in each calculated cut pipe length which terminates in:
A flange with its LOOSE attribute set to TRUE (i.e. a loose
flange)
An element of generic type WELD which has the symbol key
WF (i.e. a field-fit weld)
The allowance is taken from the value of the ALLO attribute for
the weld or flange, if set. If the value of ALLO is not set (or zero),
the allowance defaults to 150mm. The default allowance can be
altered using the LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE command.
The fabricator and/or erector can be informed of the in-built
allowance by means of a message in the title block area.
Note: The dimension shown on the isometric drawing is the actual
designed dimension.

Examples:
LOOSE 4 INCH
Adds 4 inches to tube length for each field-fitted weld or loose
flange with no ALLO value set.
LOOSE 0
No additional tube length added for field-fitted welds or loose
flange.

Command Syntax:

>--- LOOSeflangeallowance --- <uval> --->

Querying: Q LOOSeflangeallowance
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-89


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MARGIN

Function: Specifies the width of the margin on each side of the drawing.

Description: By default, a 5mm wide blank margin is provided on each side of


the drawing area. The MARGIN command allows you to specify
the widths of the left, right, top and bottom margins
independently.

Examples:
MARGIN TOP 0.5 IN
Sets top margin to 0.5 inch.
MARGIN L15 R15 T25 B25
Sets all four margins in a single command line (assumes current
units are mm).

Command Syntax:

.---------<--------.
/ |
>--- MARGin ---*--- Left value -----|
| |
|--- Right value ----|
| |
|--- Top value ------|
| |
--- Bottom value ---+--->

Related Commands:
RESERVE

Querying: Q MARGin
Q OPTions

2-90 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MARK

Function: Defines if the Pipe revision attribute (REV) should be


incremented and if the Branch detail attribute (DETA) should be
set to TRUE after successful detailing by ISODRAFT.

Description: By default, the REV and DETA attributes will not be changed
when a pipe or branch has been detailed.
If MARK DETAIL ON is set, the DETA attribute for each
Branch detailed will be set to TRUE.
If MARK REVISION ON is specified, the REV attribute of each
Pipe detailed will incremented.
By default, ISODRAFT will not detail a pipe if any of its branches
has its DETA attribute set to TRUE. To override this, use the
command MARK IGNORE ON.
The MARK command generates an inter-DB macro, to be run in
DESIGN to set the REV and DETA attributes as described. This
macro will be created (in the project's XXXMAC directory) only
when you carry out a module change or execute a SAVEWORK
command.

Examples:
MARK DETail ON
Sets the DETA attribute of each Branch to TRUE.
MARK REVision ON
Increments the REV attribute of the Pipe.
The defaults for the detail and revision flag options are:
MARK DETAIL OFF
MARK REVISION OFF
MARK IGNORE OFF

Command Syntax:

>--- MARK ---+--- DETail -----.


| |
|--- REVision ---|
| |
--- IGNOre -----+--- ON ----.
| |
--- OFF* --+--->

Querying: Q MARK
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-91


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MATCONTROL

Function: Creates a material control file.

Description: The material control file is an ASCII interface file which can be
used to pass details of material requirements to an external
material control program. This file contains fixed-format records
of all materials incorporated into the isometric drawing, including
piping components, tube, bolts, etc.
A material control file is produced for each ISODRAFT DETAIL
command. The file generated during a multiple plot run contains
material records for all pipelines detailed by that command. The
records thus derived are added to any records already in the file.
This filing command always operates in append mode: that is,
new data is always added to the end of any existing file of the
same name rather than overwriting the current contents. If the
specified file does not already exist, a new file of that name is
created.
To avoid accumulating large files (due to the use of append mode),
always delete redundant files once the required data has been
transferred to the external material control system.
The data in the file is coded so as to produce a tabulated record of
the quantity if each type of component for each pipeline or split
drawing. Each record sequence begins with a general header,
which includes references and specification applicable to the
pipeline as a whole, followed by a detailed breakdown of the
individual items.
You can add extra information to the basic material control file
using the EXTENDED command. This adds the following to the
file:
Part numbers (in word 8 of component records)
Item descriptions (as record -21)
File header with: -5 record (originating program/version)
-3 record (title block information)
Chapter 5 defines the codes used to identify the records.

(continued)

2-92 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MATCONTROL (continued)

Command Syntax:

>--- MATControl ---+--- name ---+---EXTended--.


| | |
| -------------|
|--- OFF ------------------|
| |
--------------------------+--->

Querying: Q MATControl
Q OPTIONS

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-93


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MATERIALLIST

Function: Allows you to control whether the material list is shown on the
isometric, and alter the display format if required.

Description: The MATERIALLIST command allows you to control:


Whether or not the list is shown on the drawing at all. The
default is for the list to be plotted.
The position of the list on the drawing sheet. The default is
left-hand side.
Whether the characters used for plotting the list are small,
medium or large. The default is medium.
The spacing between the lines in the list, relative to the
default of 100.
The order that columns of details are shown on the list, and
whether columns are displayed at all.
The width of the itemcode column in characters. Default is 8
characters and the maximum length is 29 characters. Both
lengths exclude the leading / in the PDMS name.
Whether or not component descriptions are included in the
list. By default all descriptions are included.
Whether part numbers created in the SPOOLER module are
used, or whether part numbers are generated automatically in
ISODRAFT and held in the Design DB (using the
PARTNUMBERS FROMDB command), or part numbers
generated by ISODRAFT (using the PARTNUMBERS
GENERATED command).
If you are using totalled database part numbers, multiple part
numbers will be output, separated by spaces, in a single entry
in the material list, wrapping round if the column width is
exceeded. You should ensure that the part numbers column is
wide enough to display several part numbers (say, eight
characters) or the material list will be just as long. The
quantity column will show the total of like items. Part number
tags will still be individual.
How the overflow of long lists is to be handled, and if extra
sheets are needed, how they are to be numbered.

(continued)

2-94 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MATERIALLIST (continued)

Formatting the Material List


If you leave ISODRAFT to its default settings (as described
below), the material list will always be produced on the left hand
side of the drawing sheet, using medium size characters to a
standard linespacing. The itemcode column will be eight
characters wide, and material descriptions will be included in the
list. A separate material list will be plotted for every drawing
sheet listing only the items on that sheet, with any continuations
being plotted on a blank, dummy sheet.
These default settings will probably be appropriate for many uses
of ISODRAFT. However, if need be you can change these settings
to your own requirements. Examples of how to do this are
included below.
Long Material Lists, and Sheet Numbering
If a material list is too long to fit onto one sheet it will normally be
continued on a dummy sheet. This sheet will be identified DRG n
OF m and will contain only the overflow of the material list. This
is the default.
Alternatively, you can specify that the material list will be
continued in a second area beside the first one. This will result in
a non-standard size for the drawing sheet, which will exceed the
normal width by the amount needed for the second material list.
Inclusion of Database Part Numbers
The SPOOLER module allows you to set part numbers on: piping
components; sections of tubes; bolts and additional items. If this
feature is used it applies to an individual pipe, individual branch
or to a drawing as defined in the SPOOLER module.
The PARTNUMBERS FROMDB command allows you to include
part numbers from the Design DB in the material list. If
ISODRAFT finds any unnumbered parts it will display an error
message and halt the drawing of the isometric. You can specify
SEParate part numbers, which will generate an entry for each
item; TOTalled part numbers, which will create a single entry for
each item with a quantity or PIPEonlyseparate, which will list all
pipes separately but will generate a totalled list of other
components.

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-95


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MATERIALLIST (continued)

If this part numbering feature of DESIGN has not been used,


ISODRAFT will produce part numbers according to its own
system defaults.
If you are using the PARTNUMBERS FROMDB option you can
define your own material list format. You can specify which items
appear on the list, and in what order they appear. The
TABLEDEFINITION command allows you to control the content,
nature and order of standard column details in the material list.
You can also define additional columns (using the commands
TABLEDEFINITION COLUMNNUMBER text attribute). In this
fashion you can define the additional column title, which SPCOM
or component attribute or UDA will be used as data to fill the
column, the column width and the order it will be shown on the
list. A remarks column may be included for the cutting list
remarks, since each piece of tube is listed separately.
The PARTNUMBERS PERSPOOL command displays part
numbers separately for each spool.
Note: If the attribute of a chosen SPCOM is a reference UDA,
referring to a text element, then the value of STEXT for
that text appears in the column.

Examples:
Material list formatting
MATE OFF
Material list not shown on drawing.
MATE RIGHT CHARH 2.0
Material list plotted on right-hand side of drawing sheet, using
2.0 mm high characters.
MATE LEFT CHARH 2.5
Material list plotted on left-hand side of drawing sheet, using 2.5
mm high characters.
MATE LSPA 105
Increases the line spacing by 5%
MATE CODE 12
Itemcode column 12 characters wide.
MATE NODESC
Material descriptions omitted from list.
MATE DESC
Material descriptions included in list. (continued)

2-96 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MATERAILLIST (continued)

MATE TABLED COL 1 QUANT


Defines column 1 in the material list as Quantity.
MATE TABLED COL 2 EMP
Sets column 2 as an empty column.
MATEriallist DRWG
Plots a separate material list on every drawing sheet, listing only
items drawn on that sheet.
MATEriallist LINE
Plots, on the first drawing sheet, a single material list for the
whole pipeline or system.
Long material lists
MATE DUMMYLong list continued on separate drawing sheet, with
no isometric plot on it. Single sheets not numbered. Multiple
sheets numbered 1 of n, 2 of n etc. This is the default.
MATE DUMM SING
Long list continued on separate drawing sheet, which has no
isometric plot on it. Single sheets numbered 1 of 1. Multiple
sheets numbered 1 of n, 2 of n etc.
MATE DUMM SUFF
Long list continued on separate drawing sheet, which has no
isometric plot on it. Single sheets not numbered. Multiple sheets
numbered 1 of n, 1A of n (for the sheet with the material list
only), 2 of n etc.
MATE OVER Long list continued to the right of the preceding list
on the same drawing sheet. Single sheets are not numbered. Note
that this may produce non-standard drawing sizes.
MATE OVER SINGle
Long list continued to the right of the preceding list on the same
drawing sheet. Sheets numbered 1 of n, 2 of n etc. Single sheets
numbered 1 of 1.
The default is:
MATE ON LEFT CHARH 2.45 LSPAC 100 CODE 8 DESC DUMMY DRWG

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-97


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MATERIALLIST (continued)

Related Commands:
ITEMCODE MTEXTS DTEXTS RESERVE

Command Syntax:
.---------------------------------<-----------------------------------.
/ |
>-MATEriallist-*- ON* -. |
| | |
|- OFF -+---------------------------------------------------------------|
| |
|- LEFT* -. |
| | |
|- RIGHT -+-------------------------------------------------------------|
| |
|- CHARHeight - value --------------------------------------------------|
| |
|- LSPAcing - integer --------------------------------------------------|
| |
|- CODE - integer ------------------------------------------------------|
| |
|- DESCriptions* -------------------------------------------------------|
| |
|- NODEscriptions ------------------------------------------------------|
| |
|- TABLEdefinition -+---------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| - COLumn val -+- PARTnumber --------------------. |
| | | |
| |- DEScription -------------------| |
| | | |
| |- BORe --------------------------| |
| | | |
| |- ITEMcode ----------------------| |
| | | |
| |- QUANtity -+- IN -+- <munits> --| |
| | | | |
| | `--------------------| |
| | | |
| |- REMarks -+- AND -+- <remarks> -| |
| | | | |
| | ---------------------| |
| | | |
| - <other> -----------------------+--|
|- PARTNumbers -+- PERSPool -. |
| | | |
| ------------+-- FROMDB ---+-- SEParate ----------. |
| | | | |
| | |-- TOTalled ----------| |
| | | | |
| | -- PIPEonlyseparate --+-----|
| | |
| - GENerated -----------------------------|
|- DUMMy* --. |
| | |
|- OVER ----+-----------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| |--- SUFFix ---+--------------------------------------------|
| | | |
| --------------+--- SINGle ---------------------------------|
|- DRWG* --. |
| | |
- LINE ---+------------------------------------------------------------+-->

(continued)

2-98 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MATERIALLIST (continued)

where <munits> is METres or MILlimetres.


This lets you set the metric units to be used for pipe lengths in the Quantity column.
Note that this affects metric isos only.

<remarks> is
.-----------------------------------------------------------------------.
/ |
--*- attribute -+- FROMSPcom -. .-----------. |
| | / | |
-------------+- ON -+- component -* | |
| | | |
|- TUBE ------| | |
| | | |
|- BOLT ------+- component -| |
| | | |
| |- TUBE ------| |
| | | |
| |- BOLT ------ |
| | |
- ALL -------+- nl -------------------|
| |
------------------------

This allows attributes or UDAs to be taken from the catalogue or from the component,
where component is one of the following:
BEND ELBOw CAP CLOSure COUPling
CROSs FBLInd FLANge FTUBe INSTrument
LJSEnd OLET TEE PCOMPonent REDUcer
SHU TRAP TUBE UNIOn VALVe
VFWAy VTWAy WELD GASKet SUPPort
ALL

<other> is -+- HEADing --.


| |
|------------+- text -.
| |
- NOHeading ---------+- attribute -+- FROMSPcom -|
| | |
| -------------|
| |
---------------------------|

Column width can be specified as part of the TABLEDEFINITION COLUMN syntax by


adding:
- WITH WIdth value -+- nl -|
| |
------

Querying: Q MATEriallist
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-99


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MATLISTFILENAME

Function: Specifies the name of a file to which the material list is to be sent.
Also specifies whether one file should be created for each plot, or
one file for all plots.

Description: You can send a copy of the material list data to a text file. This
file can be printed, and edited to produce, for example, an
ordering schedule. The MATLISTFILENAME command specifies
the filename and the page length (as the number of lines) for its
formatted contents. The file contains Fortran carriage control
characters and page headers and footers.
Subsequent MATLISTFILENAME commands followed by the same
filename will overwrite the file, unless you use the OVERWRITE
option.
By default, the material list is not sent to a file, so you do not
have to specify a filename in order to use ISODRAFT. The default
page length is 55 lines.
Material list numbers are shown on the isometric plot even when
the material list is sent only to a file.

Examples:
MATLIST /SITE_A-LIST
Material list data sent to named file with default page length of
55 lines.
MATLIST /SITE_A-LIST WITH 70 LINES
Material list data sent to named file with page length of 70 lines.
MATLIST /SITE_A-LIST PERPLOT OVER WITH 70 LINES
Material list data sent to a number of files, one for each plot, with
page length of 70 lines. The filenames are taken from the specified
name, followed by an automatic numeric suffix (in a similar
fashion to plotfile naming). The PERPLOTFILE OVERWRITE
command overwrites any files that exists with the same name as
the generated files.

(continued)

2-100 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MATLISTFILENAME (continued)

Command Syntax:
>- MATListfilename -+-filename +-OVERwrite --.
| | |
| |-APPend -----|
| | |
| |-PERPlotfile +- OVERwrite -.
| | | |
| -------------+-------------|-With integer Lines -.
| | | |
| -------------+---------------------|
| |
--- OFF* ---------------------------------------------------+->

Querying: Q MATListfilename
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-101


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MESSAGEACCURACY

Function: Controls how arrowed messages on the isometric are positioned


on the isometric.

Description: The MESSAGEACCURACY RADIAL option determines the


accuracy level of the radial search, based on the number of radial
directions searched away from the arrowhead, the number of
additional directions for kinked lines, and the length of
increments of leader lines. The levels are as follows:
Level Radial directions searched Additional directions for Length
away from arrowhead kinked lines increments of
leader line
2 directions @ 80 degrees 4mm
1 18 directions @ 20 degrees

4 directions @ 40, 80 2mm


2 36 directions @ 10 degrees
degrees
8 directions @ 20, 40, 80 1mm
3 72 directions @ 5 degrees
degrees
Once all messages have been positioned, the
MESSAGEACCURACY ITERATIONS option repositions any
messages with crossing leader lines, and all messages with leader
lines passing through the text block. You can set a maximum
number of iterations, and the process is repeated until one of the
following conditions is satisfied:
No leader lines cross and no messages need to be moved.
The number of leader lines crossing and messages moving is
the same as the previous iteration.
The maximum number of iterations set by the option is
reached.
You should start with accuracy level 1. Higher accuracy levels are
achieved at the expense of performance. Increasing the number of
iterations is not as expensive as higher accuracy levels, as often
an equilibrium is reached before the maximum number of
iterations. Thus it is recommended that the effect of increasing
iterations be examined before increasing the accuracy level.

(continued)

2-102 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MESSAGEACCURACY (continued)

Examples:
MESSAGEACC RADIAL 2
Sets the accuracy level to 2, as shown in the above table.
MESSAGEACC ITERATIONS 4
Sets the maximum number of iterations to 4.
MESSAGEACC DEFAULT
Sets the default conditions of level 1 accuracy and 1 iteration.

Command Syntax:

>--- MESSAGEACCuracy ---+--- RADial --- level -----.


| |
|--- ITerations value -----|
| |
--- DEFault --------------+--->

Querying: Q MESSAGEACCuracy

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-103


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MESSAGEFILENAME

Function: Specifies the name of the file to which messages about how
detailing is progressing will be sent.

Description: Before ISODRAFT will carry out a checking or detailing


operation, you must specify the name of a file to which error
and/or progress messages can be sent. There is no default file
name.

Examples:
MESS /ISOMESS
Creates a new message file.
MESS /ISOMESS OVER
Overwrites an existing file.

Command Syntax:

>--- MESSagefilename filename ---+--- OVER ---.


| |
------------+--->

Querying: Q MESSagefilename
Q OPTions

2-104 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MTEXTS

Function: Controls the material description part of item descriptions.

Description: A complete item description in a material list consists of the


geometric description (derived from the attributes of a DTEXT
element) and the material description (derived from the attributes
of an MTEXT element).
MTEXT has three attributes: XTEXT, YTEXT and ZTEXT. By
default, the text which appears in the material list is the XTEXT
attribute, but this can be changed so that the text stored in the
YTEXT or ZTEXT attribute is displayed. This can be used, for
example, to store descriptions in different languages.
The MTEXTS IGNORE command allows you to suppress the
material description to give a more concise material list entry.

Examples:
MTEXts Ytext
Sets the description to the text held in the YTEXT attribute
MTEXts Ztext
Sets the description to the text held in the ZTEXT attribute
MTEXts Xtext
Sets the description to the text held in the XTEXT attribute. This
is the default.
MTEXts IGNORE
Suppresses the material description completely.
MTEXts ON
Resets the material description to the text previously set. (XTEXT
by default.)

Related Commands:
MATERIALLIST DTEXTS

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-105


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

MTEXTS (continued)

Command Syntax:

>--- MTEXts ---+--- IGNORE ---.


| |
|--- ON -------|
| |
|--- Xtext* ---|
| |
|--- Ytext ----|
| |
--- Ztext ----+--->

Querying: Q MTEXT
Q OPTIONS

2-106 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

OPTIONS

Function: Allows you to reset all options to their default settings.

Description: The OPTIONS command gives you a quick way of querying the
current settings of multiple options or of resetting all options to
their default states. Note that after giving this command, you
must specify the destination (terminal or file) and the message
file again.

Command Syntax:

>--- OPTions DEFault --->

Querying: Q OPTions Gives current settings of all options.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-107


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

OUTCOM

Function: Defines the style in which attributes are output on the isometric
drawing area. You can also output the P3 directions of FTUB
elements.

Description: You can output piping component attributes and user-defined


attributes on the isometric drawing area. You can choose whether
the text is boxed or unboxed, and the style of box used. You can
also output empty boxes for manual mark-up. Six styles are
available:
A rectangular box with straight ends
A rectangular box with angled ends
A rectangular box with round ends
A triangular box
A diamond-shaped box
Unboxed

Examples:
OUTC NAME SHOP :UDA1 ON INST ELBO PCOM WITH STR
Positions the attribute values for NAME, SHOP and the UDA
values for UDA1 as straight edged boxed comments on all
Instruments and Pcoms. The box leader line points to the centre of
the component.
OUTC SHOP OFF
Switches off the output of the SHOP attributes for all components.
OUTC BLANK 6 ON BEND WITH ANGL
Outputs an empty angled-edge box on all bends with space for 6
text characters.
OUTC NAME ON ELBO OFF
Switches off output of the NAME attribute on ELBOWS.
OUTC P3DIRF WITH STRAIGHT
Outputs P3 directions for FTUB as a straight edged box.

(continued)

2-108 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

OUTCOM (continued)

Restrictions:
Triangular boxes will have a limit of two characters.
Diamond boxes will have a limit of three characters.
Unset attributes will not be output.
Warnings are not output for unset or nonexistent attributes.
Empty boxes which are drawn as unboxed will not be shown.

Command Syntax:
.-----<-----.
/ |
>- OUTCom -*- attribute -+
| |
|- P3DIRFtub -+----------------.
| | |
|-------------+- ON component -+- WITH --.
| | | |
| | |---------+- BOXStyle style ---.
| | | |
| ----------------+- OFF ------------------------|
| |
- OFF -------------------------------------------------------+->

where attribute is one of the following:


NAME OWNER POSItion ORIentation SPREf
LSTUbe BUILt SHOP ISPEc TSPEc
ANGLe HEIGht RADIus LOOSe LOFFl
ALLOwance CREF CRFA CSTReLAXEs
ATTYp SPLN SPLT LEND TYPE
BLANK n :udaname :udaname NUMBER integer
where :udaname NUMBER integer outputs a single element of a UDA
array.
component is one of the following:
BEND ELBOw CAP CLOSure COUPling
CROSs FBLInd FLANge FTUBeINSTrument
LJSEnd OLET TEE PCOMPonent REDUcer
SHU TRAP UNIOn VALVe VFWAy
VTWAy WELD GASKet SUPPort ALL
style is one of the following:
STRaight ANGLed ROUNd TRIangular DIAMond
(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-109


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

OUTCOM (continued)

Querying:
Q OUTCom
Lists all attributes output.
Q OUTCom attribute
Lists information about the named attribute.
Q OUTCom BLANK
Lists all blank lengths output, e.g. 6, 8, 12.
Q OUTCom BLANK n
Lists information about the blank of given length.
Q OUTCom UDA
Lists the names of all UDAs output.
Q OUTCom :udaname
Lists information for the named UDA.
Q OUTCom :udaname NUMBer integer
Lists information about the given element of a UDA array.
Q OUTCom PTDIRF
Lists information about tagging P3 directions on FTUBs.
Q OPTIONS
Lists all options set.

Note that the following queries are for application work only, and
should not be used in normal program use. Triplets are a
combination of attribute, component and boxstyle:
Q OUTCom TRIPlets
Lists the number of triplets.
Q OUTCom TRIPlets n
Lists the details (component/attribute/ boxstyle) of triplet number
n.
Q OUTCom BLANKTRIPlets
Lists the number of blank triplets.
Q OUTCom BLANKTRIPlets n
Lists the details (component/number of characters/boxstyle) of
blank triplet number n.

2-110 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

OVERALLSKEWS

Function: Allows you to specify whether triangular skewboxes are shown as


overall skewboxes across branches, or as separate skewboxes
between branch connections.

Examples:
OVERALLSKEWS ON
Triangle skewboxes shown as overall skewboxes across branches
OVERALLSKEWS OFF
Triangle skewboxes shown as separate skewboxes between branch
connections.

Related Commands:
SKEWBOX

Command Syntax:

>--- OVERALLSKews ---+--- ON* ---.


| |
--- OFF ---+-->

Querying: Q OVERALLSK
Q OPTIONS

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-111


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

PBENDNUMBERS

Function: Numbering the pulled bends in Spool Drawings on an isometric.

Description: By default SPOOLER automatically generates numbers for every


pulled bend in a Spool Drawing. These numbers can be output on
an isometric, by switching PBENDNumbers ON.
Note: This function has no effect when plotting isometrics
from the Design database.
The bends are sequentially numbered from one end of the Spool
Drawing with a default prefix of B. The numbers are displayed in
a diamond, with an arrow pointing to the pulled bend. If the total
number of characters (prefix + number) is greater than 3, the
number is displayed in angled brackets; e.g. <B232>.

Examples:
PBENDN ON Switches pulled bend numbering on.
PBENDN OFF Switches pulled bend numbering off.

Related Commands:
JOINTNUMBERS WELDNUMBERS

Syntax Graph:

>--- PBENDNumbers ---+--- ON ----.


| |
--- OFF ---+--->

Querying: Q PBENDNumbers
Q OPTIONS

2-112 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

PICTURESCALE

Function: Allows you to set the scale of the isometric drawing.

Description: For a given sheet size, the scale of the isometric drawing is set by
default to give a good compromise between the amount of
information displayed and its legibility. The PICTURESCALE
command allows you to reset the scale. The value you give is the
scale factor relative to the default value of 100.
Note that changing the picture scale does not scale the whole
isometric, but just affects the size of the symbols and annotation
relative to the length of pipe shown. The material list is not
affected.
It is probable that increasing the picture scale much above 100
will split the drawing onto more sheets. See the SPLIT command
for details of how this can be controlled.

Examples:
PICT 200 Magnifies the symbols to twice the size.
PICT 50 Reduces the size of the symbols by half.

Related Commands:
SPLIT

Command Syntax:

>--- PICTurescale --- value --->

Querying: Q PICTureSCale
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-113


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

PLOTDETAILDATA

Function: Allows you to position parameterised attribute data within detail


plots.

Description: Detail plots may also contain the parameterised values of any
allowable type of system or user defined attributes. The attributes
are defined using the PLOTDETaildata command. This definition
includes the following fields:
Which attributes to display.
X, Y coordinates of the parameterised text, relative to the
origin of the detail plot.
Character height.
Angle at which to display text.
The values of the different types of attributes are output as text
records, using the following formats:
Array attributes are shown separated by a line.
Reference attributes are output as the full text of the
attribute.
Logical attributes are shown as T or F.
Position, orientation and direction attributes are separated by
spaces.

Examples:
PLOTDET /DETAIL1 ATTR PPOS 1 x 10 y 10 h 10 a 45
Plots the value of attribute PPOS 1 in DETAIL1, at a position of
10:10 from the origin, with a character height of 10 and at an
angle of 45.
PLOTDET /DETAIL6 ATTR DPFN x 10 y 5 h 3.5 a 0
Plots the value of attribute DPFN in DETAIL6, at a position of
10:5 from the origin, with a character height of 3.5 and at an
angle of 0.

(continued)

2-114 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

PLOTDETAILDATA (continued)

Command Syntax:
>-- PLOTDETaildata -- ATTRibute - ATQNUM --+- X ------.
| |
|- Y ------|
| |
|- Height -|
| |
`- Angle --+- value ->
Querying:
Q PLOTDETaildata All
Will output all information for all detailed plot files.
Q PLOTDETaildata /filename All
Will list details of all parameters for the given plot file.
Q PLOTDETaildata /filename NUM/ATTRIBUTES
Will display the number of attributes for the given plot file.
Q PLOTDETaildata /filename ATTR INT
Will return the X,Y coordinates, height and angle of the INTth
parameter in the specified plot file.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-115


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

PLOTTINGSCALE

Function: Defines the scale of the plot independently of the drawing sheet
size.

Description: By default, the actual size of the plotted drawing sheet generated
by ISODRAFT is the same as the designed sheet size specified by
the SIZE command. You can specify a plotted sheet smaller than
the designed sheet by using the PLOTTINGSCALE command
followed by a percentage scaling factor in the range 50100%.

Examples:
PLOT 70.71
Applied to an A2 drawing, will create an A3 plot (70.71 = 1/2
expressed as a percentage). This can be useful if, for example, you
want the drawing layout provided for an A2 plot, but you want
output from an A3 plotter.
PLOT 50
Applied to an A1 drawing, will create an A3 plot.

Command Syntax:

>--- PLOTtingscale value --->


where value represents a percentage scaling factor in the range
50100%. The default is 100.

Querying: Q PLOTT
Q OPTIONS

2-116 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

POSITION

Function: Allows you to create tables of standard text annotations or pipe


attributes.

Description: All items of text used for the standard annotation of isometrics
have default positions at which they are plotted on the drawings.
Some of these texts, together with a list of specified pipe
attributes, can be plotted in a separate area away from the main
drawing.
The standard text annotations which can be repositioned are as
follows:
The North direction arrow;
Spool numbers;
Sheet numbers; i.e. X in DRG X OF Y;
Sheet totals; i.e. Y in DRG X OF Y;
The Project Number;
System isometric names;
The Bend radius;
The date.
You can also specify the positions of up to 100 additional pipe
attributes such as the pipes name, owner, temperature and
pressure rating, and include UDAs and user-specified text. You
can also specify the position of drawing attributes when detailing
a drawing as defined by the SPOOLER module, using the System
attribute option.
All text must be positioned in a margin, away from the drawing
area, to avoid overwriting the isometric plot itself. You will
normally allocate a suitable margin by using the MARGIN or
RESERVE commands.
CAUTION: No checks on text positions are made by ISODRAFT, so you must
take care not to corrupt the isometric by poor positioning.

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-117


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

POSITION (continued)

Note: Positioning an annotation at the origin (0, 0) has the effect


of suppressing the output of that text. This is particularly
useful for suppressing the output of names or the North
arrow.

It is possible to output the same piece of text at more than one


position on an isometric plot by defining its coordinates more than
once. The new definitions will not overwrite the earlier ones. The
command POSITION text OFF is used to cancel a defined text
position.

You can define an angle of rotation for the positioned text,


ranging from horizontal to vertical, using the ANGLE command.
The POSITION command also allows you to produce a number of
different tables on the isometric:
BENDING TABLES can be produced using the BENDTABLE
command. This creates a sketch showing a schematic of a bend,
annotated to show the various bend parameters, and a table
giving the appropriate lengths, radii and angles for pulled bends
appearing on that drawing. If needed, you can output the data as
an ASCII file for transfer to a bending machine.
Drawing History Tables can be included using the
REVISIONTABLE command. This produces a detailed history of
the drawing (for example dates, descriptions, who drew and
approved the drawing and so on). Details for up to ten revisions of
the isometric will be included (numbered 0 to 9). Only UDAs can
be selected for the table, and each UDA represents a family (for
example, :REV0 means subsequent table entries will be taken
from :REV0, :REV1, :REV2 and so on until an unset attribute is
found.

(continued)

2-118 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

POSITION (continued)

Design Conditions Tables are available through the


SYSTEMTABLE command. These apply to system isometrics or
drawings as defined by the SPOOLER module. For each column a
pipe attribute or UDA can be selected (see the tabledef syntax
description). If a SHORTCODE is defined it will be used to label
the divisions between pipes on a drawing (a shortcode of L will
label pipes as L1, L2 etc.). This shortcode can be included in the
table against the pipe name. Also, you can specify delimiter
characters for pipe name prefix and suffix. If you select either or
both delimiters for a name, the prefix or suffix will be stripped off
before outputting the pipe name to the table. Therefore, two pipes
forming one line on the P&ID, bearing the same basic name but
with different area code suffixes, will appear as a single name in
the table.
Weld Tables can be included by using the WELDTABLE command,
and this also allows you to create a Weld Report File. Note that
WELDNUMBERS FROMDB must be selected if you wish to
produce either a user-defined Weld Table or a Weld Report File
(see the WELDNUMBERS command). Each column must be set to
be filled by an attribute or UDA of the welds. You can choose one
column as an alphanumeric sort key (the default being the weld
number). If you choose a column other than weld number as a sort
key, the table will be sorted firstly by your selected column and
secondly by weld number. The sort order can be forwards
(meaning numbers start at the top of the table) or reverse
(numbers start at the bottom of the table). Column title can be left
blank if needed, and you can leave column contents empty if
desired.
Dynamic Detail Area Plot Files can be included using the
DETAILPLOTS command. These can show details of any
particular item of interest on the isometric (welded supports,
drain and vent assemblies, complex manifolds etc.).

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-119


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

POSITION (continued)
Command Syntax:
>-POSItion -----.
|
>-TEXTPOSition -+-SYSTEMName-------.
| |
|-SPOOlnumber------|
| |
|-PROJnumber-------|
| |
|-DATE-------------|
| |
|-NORTHArrow-------|
| |
|-SHEETNumber------|
| |
|-SHEETTotal-------|
| |
|-BENDRADius-------|
| |
|-SYSTem attribute-|
| |
|-attribute--------|
| |
|-text ------------+-AT-+-X <uval> Y <uval>-.
| | | |
| | -Y <uval> X <uval>-+-CHARH val -+-ANGle val -.
| | | |
| | |------------+-BOXed--.
| | | |
| | +-<xyoff>-<tab>-------+-.
| | -----------------------|
| |- <reltxt> --------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| - OFF -------------------------------------------------------|
|-BENDtable-------------------+- <possiz> --. |
| | | |
| |- FILEonly ---| |
| | | |
|-REVISIONTable---. - OFF --------+-----------------------------------|
| | |
|-SYSTEMTable-----+- <possiz> -. |
| | | |
| |- OFF ------+-----------------. |
| | | |
- ADD -- <tabledef> ----------+-------------------------------|
| |
|-WELDtable----+--<sortby>--. |
| | | |
| |------------+--<possiz>--. |
| | | | |
| | --FILEonly--| |
| | | |
| ----ADD---<tabledef>-----+---------------------------------------|
| |
|-DETAILPlots -+-CORner-<possiz>-<direc>-+-STACK-<int>-<direc>-. |
| | | | |
| | ---------------------+- SCALE-<int> ---|
| | |
| |-MAnual- CHARH val --SCALE-<int> --------------------------------|
| | |
| |-ON -------------------------------------------------------------|
| | |
| OFF ------------------------------------------------------------|
|-TEXTs------------. |
| | |
|-ATTRibutes-------| |
| | |
|-SYSTEMATTRibutes-+---OFF-------------------------------------------------------|
--------------------------------------------------------------------------------+->

(continued)

2-120 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

POSITION (continued)

xyoff defines the x and y offsets between the columns and rows for positioning attributes
on system isometrics, as follows:

>--+-- XOFFset - <uval> --+-- YOFFset - <uval> --.


| ----------------------|
| |
-- YOFFset - <uval> --+-- XOFFset - <uval> --|
----------------------+-->
uval is a dimension in either the current or specified units. For example:
X 10 Y 30 current units
X 0.5 inches Y 1.2 inches specified units
reltxt positions the specified corner of the new text relative to the specified corner of the
previous text by the X and Y offset distances. The syntax for this is:
- BL -| Where: BL = bottom left
| BR = bottom right
- BR -| TL = top left
| TR = top right
- TL -|
|
- TR -+- RELto -+- BL -.
| |
|- BR -|
| |
|- TL -|
| |
- TR -+- XOFF -value-|- YOFF -value-|- CHARH -value-+- BOX -.
| | |
| +-------|
-----------------------------------------------------+->

For example, the command:


BR REL TL XOFF 10 YOFF 20 CHARH 2.5 BOX

will position the bottom-right corner of the new text 10 mm across and 20 mm up from
the top-left corner of the previous text. The new text will be boxed and have a character
height of 2.5 mm.
tab defines the number of rows and columns in the table and the order in which they are
filled:

>- DIREction -+- Horizontal -.


| |
- Vertical ---+- Rows value - Columns value ->

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-121


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

POSITION (continued)

tabledef defines the headings and contents for the production of user defined tables.
Note that ISODRAFT automatically tabulates the contents of the tables and draws lines
between the rows and columns. The syntax is:
.------------------------------------------------------------------------------.
>-+- COLumn number -+- HEADing--. |
| | | |
|-----------------+-----------+--text--. |
| | | |
| - NOHeading---------+--FILL--. |
| | | |
| |--------+--attribute--. |
| | | | |
| | --SHORTcode--| |
| | | |
| --EMPty-------------------WIdth value--|

where number is the number of the column you wish to define, text is the column
heading (in inverted commas), attribute is any attribute name and value is the column
width in characters. Note that SHORTCODE applies to the System Table only.
possiz allows you to position your table:
>- CORner -+- BL -.
|- BR -|
|- TL -|
`- TR -+- AT -.
| |
------+- X <uval> Y <uval> -.
| |
- Y <uval> X <uval> -+- CHARacterHeight value ->

with BL being Bottom Left, TR being Top Right, and so on. This allows you to position
one of the corners of the table exactly.
direcn gives a direction for future detail plots:
>-- DIRection --+- Up ----.
| |
|- Down --|
| |
|- Left --|
| |
-Right --+-->
CHARHeight value is the character height in mm. The default size is 2.1mm, while the
minimum size is 1.4mm.

(continued)

2-122 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

POSITION (continued)

sortby is:
>-- SORTby -- attribute --+-- FORwards --.
| |
-- REVerse ---+-->
Note: For detailing at Branch level, attributes NAME, PSPEC, ISPEC,
TSPEC and PTSP are taken from the Branch settings. Other attributes
are taken from the Pipe settings.
If you position any pipe attribute which has an associated ATEXT, the
output of the Atext will be suppressed.
Example: Defining a Spool Number Table
A 4x3 table of spool numbers can be set up by using the command
POSI SPOOLN AT X 100 Y 10 CHARH 3 XOFF -10 YOFF 8 DIRE V R 4 C 3
These table parameters (i.e. X Offset 10 mm; Y Offset 8 mm; Character height 3 mm;
Direction Vertical; Number of rows 4; Number of columns 3) will generate the following
output for a pipe containing 11 spools:

[8] [4]

[11] [7] [3]

[10] [6] [2]


8mm Direction
[9] [5] [1] of table

-10mm y

The origin of the table (which was positioned at X 100mm, Y 10mm by the POSI
SPOOLN command) is at the bottom left-hand corner of the first spool number.
If you specify SPOOLNUMBERS OFF before plotting the isometric, the space allocated
for the table will appear as a blank area. If you specify SPOOLNUMBERS PREFIX, the
prefix will be plotted with the spool number.
If the number of spools exceeds the number of places available in the table (12 in this
example), the table will be filled and then an error message will be generated.

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-123


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

POSITION (continued)

Example: Creating a Drawing History Table


If you wished to plot a table that showed the history of an isometric and who was
involved in its production, you could enter the following commands:
POSI REVISIONT COR BL AT X 20 Y 40 CHARH 2.0 COL 1 HEAD Rev :REV0 WI 3
COL 2 HEAD Description :DES0 WI 8
COL 3 HEAD Date :DAT0 WI 8
C0L 4 HEAD Drwn By :DRW0 WI 7
COL 5 HEAD Chkd By :CHK0 WI 11
COL 6 HEAD Appd By :APA0 WI 11
COL 7 HEAD Appd By :APB0 WI 9
EXIT
Example: A System Isometric
The following commands will position the pipe attributes NAME, BORE, TEMP, PRESS
and CCEN as shown in Appendix B.
MATE OFF (Material List not plotted)
MARG R 120 (Set width of right margin)
DIME COMP ON (Plot composite-style dimensions)
SPLIT 1 DRW (Plot whole system on a single sheet)
POSI NAME AT X480 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V ROWS 6 COLU 1
POSI BORE AT X510 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V ROWS 6 COLU 1
POSI TEMP AT X525 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V ROWS 6 COLU 1
POSI PRESS AT X540 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V ROWS 6 COLU 1
POSI CCEN AT X555 Y150 CHARH 4.5 YOFF -9 DIRE V ROWS 6 COLU 1
DETAIL /SYSTEM1 /SYSTEM2 /SYSTEM3 /SYSTEM4 AS /ISOG96.TEST

Querying: Q OPTions
Q TEXTPOSitions Lists all current user-defined text positions.
Q TEXTPOSitions text
Lists the position of the attribute given by
text.

The following query commands list the parameters set for the
item, as described in the previous pages:

Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMName
Q TEXTPOSitions SPOOlnumbers
Q TEXTPOSitions PROJnumber
Q TEXTPOSitions DATE
Q TEXTPOSitions NORTHArrow
Q TEXTPOSitions SHEETNumber

(continued)

2-124 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

POSITION (continued)

Q TEXTPOSitions BENDRADius
Q TEXTPOSitions UDA
Q TEXTPOSitions BENDtable
Q TEXTPOSitions REVISIONTable
Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMTable
Q TEXTPOSitions WELDTable
Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTem
Q TEXTPOSitions TABlewidths

Note that the following queries are for application use only:
Q TEXTPOSitions TEXT
Tells you the number of user text strings ( i.e. ABC strings)
positioned.
Q TEXTPOSitions TEXT n
Gives the actual string value for the item at position n in the list.
Q TEXTPOSitions TEXT text
Gives the details (X, Y coordinates, character heights etc.) for text.
Q TEXTPOSitions ATTRibute
Number of pipe attributes/UDAs positioned.
Q TEXTPOSitions ATTRibute n
Gives actual attribute of item in position n in the list.
Q TEXTPOSition <att>
Gives details of the named attribute.
Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMATTRibute
Gives the number of drawing attributes/UDAs.
Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMATTRibute n
Gives the attribute at position n in the list.
Q TEXTPOSitions SYSTEMATTRibute <att>
Gives the details of the named attribute.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-125


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

POSTPROCESS

Function: Lets you specify up to five system commands which are to be


executed during ISODRAFT's intermediate transfer file
processing.

Description: The POSTPROCESS command defines system commands which


will be executed after ISODRAW has finished processing the
intermediate transfer file and before control is returned to
ISODRAFT. You can define up to such five commands, each
identified by an integer.

Examples:
POSTPROCESS 2 'any system command' 3 'another command'

Command Syntax:

.-----------------.
/ |
>--- POSTPROcess -+- integer - text --+-->

Related Commands:
PREPROCESS
PROCESS

2-126 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

PRECISION

Function: Sets bore dimensions to be nominal or actual.

Description: Sets bore dimensions to be nominal or actual.

Examples:
PRECISION BORES NOMINAL
Sets bore dimensions to be nominal
PRECISION BORES ACTUAL
Sets bore dimensions to be actual

Command Syntax:

>--- PRECIsion BORES ---+--- NOMINAL ---.


| |
--- ACTUAL ----+--->

Querying: Q PRECIsion BORES

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-127


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

PREPROCESS

Function: Lets you specify up to five system commands which are to be


executed during ISODRAFT's intermediate transfer file
processing.

Description: The PREPROCESS command defines system commands which


will be executed after the intermediate transfer file has been
written and before ISODRAW is invoked. You can define up to
five such commands, each identified by an integer.

Examples:
PREPROCESS 2 'any system command' 3 'another command'

Command Syntax:

.-----------------.
/ |
>--- PREPROcess -+- integer - text --+-->

Related Commands:
POSTPROCESS
PROCESS

2-128 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

PROCESS

Function: Instructs ISODRAFT to process a transfer file.

Description: The PROCESS command is used to process a transfer file. The


operation takes account of any preprocessing or postprocessing
actions which have been defined.

Examples:
PROCESS TRANS /TRANSFER
Processes a transfer file named /TRANSFER.

Command Syntax:

>--- PROCess TRANsferfilename filename --->

Related Commands:
PREPROCESS
POSTPROCESS

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-129


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

PROJECTNUMBER

Function: Writes the project number in the title block area.

Description: The PROJECTNUMBER command writes the project number into


the title block area. A project number of up to 12 alphanumeric
characters can be used. The default is for no project number to be
shown on the drawings.
If PROJECTNUMBER FROMSYSTEM is specified, the project
number shown on entry to the project, and stored within the
System DB, will be plotted automatically. This text will have been
set by the System Administrator using ADMIN.

Examples:
PROJECTN FRO
The project number will be taken from the system project number.
PROJECTN AA-1234-ZZ
The project number will be AA-1234-ZZ.

Command Syntax:

>--- PROJECTNumber ---+--- text ----------.


| |
--- FROmsystem ---+--->

Querying:
Q PROJECTNumber
Q OPTIONS

2-130 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

QUERY

Function: Allows you to find the current settings of various options.

Command Syntax:

>--- Query --- option --->


The main ISODRAFT options are:
ATTAName ATExt ATExt value
AXES BENDRADius BOLTing
CHARHeight CLLEngthfilename
CONTinuationsymbols
CONTNotes CONTWelds COOrdinates
COORDS CUTMarks CUTPipelistfile
CUTTinglist DATE DELImiter
DETAILList DIMDist DIMEnsions
DTEXts ELEVations EQUIPMENTNumbering
FALLinglines FLOWarrows FRAMe
INSTName INSUlationcontrol ISO
ISOType ITEMcode ITEMcode LENGTH
KEYS KEYS keynumber LEGLength
LOOSeflangeallowance MARGin MARK
MATControl MATEriallist MATListfilename
MESSagefilename MTEXts OPTions
OUTCom OUTCom attribute OUTCom BLANK value
OUTPut UNITS OVERALLSKews PICTurescale
PLOTTingscale PROJECTNumber REFDIMensions
REPEatbility REServe RETUrnfilename
SIZE SKEWbox SPECBreak
SPLIt SPOOlnumbers
STACkingarrangement
SUPPORTFilename SUPPorts SYMBolfilename
TAGging TAPping TEXTPOSitions
TEXTPOSitions text TITleblock TITleblock value
TOLerance TRACingcontrol TRANsferfilename
TRUNcate TUBESplits UNDerlayplotname
UNITS WASTage WASTage integer
WELDId WELDNumbers WELDType

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-131


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

RECREATE

Function: Creates a macro file or binary file which can then be run into
ISODRAFT again.

Description: On UNIX workstations, the RECREATE command can be used to


create a macro file which can then be read into ISODRAFT again
to recreate the existing option settings or the detail list. See the
VANTAGE Plant Design Software Customisation Guide for more
information about writing and using macros. You can also use the
RECREATE command to save the screen layout, which can then
be read in again using the INSTALL SETUP command.
RECREATE has other options available in different PDMS
modules. See the relevant Reference Manuals for details.

Examples:
RECReate OPTions /OPT OVER
Saves the current option settings in a file named /OPT. Any
existing file named /OPT will be overwritten.
RECReate DETAillist /LIST
Saves the detail list in a file named /LIST
RECReate /DISP
Saves the screen display in a file named /DISP.

Related Commands:
INSTALLSETUP

Command Syntax:

>-- RECReate --+----------------.


| |
|-- OPTions -----|
| |
-- DETAillist --+-- filename --+-- OVERwrite --.
| |
---------------+-->

2-132 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

REFDIMENSIONS

Function: Switches the display of reference dimensions on and off.

Description: If reference dimensions have been set up in the Design database,


they can be shown on isometric plots by using the
REFDIMENSIONS command.

Examples:
REFDimensions ON
Displays reference dimensions.
REFDimensions OFF
Reference dimensions are not displayed.

Command Syntax:

>--- REFDimensions ---+--- ON ----.


| |
--- OFF ---+--->

Querying: Q REFDIMensions
Q OPTIONS

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-133


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

REMOVE

Function: Removes named elements from the list of items to be processed by


the next DETAIL or CHECK command.

Description: The elements to be checked or detailed by ISODRAFT can be


defined before giving the CHECK or DETAIL command by setting
up a Detail List. You add elements to the list using the ADD
command and remove them using the REMOVE command. The
next CHECK ALL or DETAIL ALL command acts on elements in the
current Detail List (that is, all elements in the Add List except
those in the Remove List).

Examples:
REMOVE /PIPE3-1 /BRAN3-2-2
Removes the named elements from the Detail List.
REMOVE EMPTY
Empties the Remove List.

Related Commands:
ADD CHECK DETAIL REPEATABILITY

Command Syntax:
.----<-------------------------------------------------.
/ |
>-- REMove ----+--- <gid> ----------------------------------------------|
| |
|-- SHEETNumber --+--- integer --. |
| | | |
| --- SINGle ---+---------. |
| | |
|-- SPOOL --+-- integer --+-- OF integer --| |
| | | | |
| | ----------------| |
| | | |
| -- text -----------------------+--- <gid> ---|
| |
----EMPTY-----------------------------------------------+--->

Note that DETAIL EMPTY also empties the Remove List. See the
DETAIL command.

(continued)

2-134 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

REMOVE (continued)

Restrictions:

The maximum number of element identifiers allowed in a


Remove List is 100.
The maximum number of items for any single pipe (sheets or
spools) is 20. You can only add sheetsfor a Pipe which has
previously been detailed with Repeatability on, so that split
points have been stored in the Design database. See the
REPEATABILITY command.

Querying: Q DETaillist Lists contents of both Add and Remove lists.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-135


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

REPEATABILITY

Function: Creates split ATTAs at automatically generated split points for


subsequent storage in the Design DB.

Description: When a pipe is detailed which needs splitting over more than one
sheet, ISODRAFT automatically generates split points. Normally
this data is not stored, and so if the design is altered and the pipe
detailed again, the split points may be in different places.
Repeatability allows you to save these split points in a macro to be
run in DESIGN. This macro stores the split point information in
the Design DB. You can then use this information to replot single
sheets when you have made changes to your design which only
affect those sheets, keeping the split points in the same positions
as before.
A function in the SPOOLER module allows you to erase this split
point information if need be.
Repeatability is not available for system isometrics or equipment
trims.
Split ATTAs are automatically created at split points, in correct
list order, with correct coordinates. Once in place they are
indistinguishable from split ATTAs that have been manually
created. They can be repositioned as required. The macro will
select the ATTA using default selectors, and then set its ATTYPE
attribute to XXXX. (The macro will be handled in the same
manner as an inter-DB connection macro.)
Note: Prior to Version 10.4, the REPEATABILITY command also
stored spool identifiers in the database. This function is now
replaced by the SPOOLER module functionality.

Examples:
REPE ON
REPE OFF

(continued)

2-136 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

REPEATABILITY (continued)

Related Commands:
ADD DETAIL REMOVE SPLIT

Command Syntax:

>--- REPEatability ---+--- ON------.


| |
--- OFF* ---+--->

Restrictions:
Split ATTAs will not be automatically created if some already
exist in the pipe.
Re-ordering branches will destroy the integrity of the
repeatability data.
Repeatability is not available for system isometrics or
equipment trims.

Querying: Q REPEATABILITY
Q OPTIONS

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-137


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

RESERVE

Function: Allows you to specify a blank area at the bottom of the drawing
area or the Material list.

Description: You can reserve an area at the bottom of the drawing area or
Material list, which will be left blank when the isometric is
plotted. Note that if you want a blank area across the whole sheet,
not just the drawing area, you should use the MARGIN command
to specify a large bottom margin.
A reserved area can be used for standard notes, detail plot files, a
company name, etc. or it can be filled by information on a backing
sheet using the UNDERLAYPLOT command.
The default is a reserved height of zero; that is, no reserved area.

Examples:
RESERVE 30
Reserves an area 30 units high across the drawing area.
RESERVE 2 INCH
Reserves an area 2 inches high across the drawing area.
RESERVE MAT 30
Reserves an area 30 units high across the bottom of the Material
list.

Related Commands:
MARGIN

Command Syntax:

>--- REServe -+-- <uval> --------------------.


| |
-- MATeriallist --- <uval> ---+--->

Querying: Q REServe
Q OPTions

2-138 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SETCOMPDATE

Function: Sets the Comparison Date for an MDB or DB.

Description: Sets the Comparison Date for an MDB or DB. You can set the
comparison date to an actual date, to a stamp, or, for a specific
DB, to an exact session number and/or extract number. The
comparison date can be used in queries and, for example, in
Change Highlighting, where it is necessary to specify a
comparison date in order to determine which elements have been
changed since the specified date.
Notes:
1. If a stamp is used to set the comparison date, this
will set the comparison session for each database
within the stamp. It will also reset any comparison
dates set previously.
2. Querying a date will only return a value if the last
SETCOMPDATE command used a date on its own,
otherwise it will return 'unset'. Similarly, querying a
stamp is only valid if the last SETCOMPDATE
command used a stamp.

Examples:
SETCOMPDATE 10 January 2002
Sets the comparison date to 10 January 2002.
SETCOMPDATE STAMP stamp 016
Sets the comparison date to stamp 016.

Related Commands:
CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING

Command Syntax:
>- SETCOMPDATE -+- <date> ----------------------------------------------------------------.
|- STAMP - name ----------------------------------------------------------|
- FOR - DB - dbname - TO -+-- <date> ------------------------------------|
|-- Session -- integer -- EXTRACT -+- integer -|
| '- dbname -|
|-- Session -- integer ------------------------|
'-- EXTRACT -+- integer -----------------------|
'- dbname ------------------------+->

Querying: Q COMPDATE EXTRACT FOR DB CTBATEST/DESI


Q COMPDATE COMPDATE SESSION FOR DB CTBATEST/DESI

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-139


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SIZE

Function: Specifies the overall dimensions of the drawing sheet.

Description: The SIZE command allows you to specify the dimensions of the
drawing sheet; either in current or specified units, or as a stan-
dard ISO or American drawing sheet size. The default is ISO A2.
ISODRAFT will subtract the current margins and reserved area
(if any) before laying out the isometric plot, the material list,
frame and title block in the remaining area of the sheet.

Examples:
SIZE A3 Specifies ISO A3 size.
SIZE AA Specifies American A size.
SIZE H 300 W 400
Specifies dimensions 300mm high x 400mm wide (assuming
current units are mm).

Related Commands:
MARGIN RESERVE

Command Syntax:
>--- SIZE ---+--- AA ---.
| |
|--- AB ---|
| |
|--- AC ---|
| |
|--- AD ---|
| |
|--- AE ---+---------------------------------.
| |
|--- A --- integer --------------------------|
| |
|--- Height --- value --- Width --- value ---|
| |
--- Width --- value --- Height --- value ---+--->

Restrictions: Standard ISO sizes, as defined by integer, must be in the range


A0 to A4.

Querying: Q SIZE
Q OPTions

2-140 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SKEWBOX

Function: Controls how skewed piping is represented.

Description: Any skewed sections of piping, whether or not they involve a fall,
can be represented either by full boxes (2D or 3D; see the
FALLSKEWS command) or by triangles.

Full box Triangle

Figure 2-6 Full and triangle skewboxes.


If triangle representation is specified, the following options are
available:
The dimensions can be shown in standard form or in a non-
standard form.
The triangle areas can be shown hatched (shaded), partially
hatched or unhatched.
Skew triangles can be tagged with swing angles in the corners
of the triangles. These are output in the first corners of the
triangles in the direction the line is detailed.
H and V notes can be output in the right angle corners of
horizontal (H) and vertical (V) triangles.
Overall skewboxes, or skewboxes between branches, can be
shown.

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-141


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SKEWBOX (continued)

Standard dimensioning Non-standard dimensioning Hatched

Figure 2-7 Standard and non-standard dimensioning styles, and hatching.


Standard dimensioning shows the horizontal and vertical
dimension lines of the triangle standing out from the sides of the
triangle. Non-standard dimensioning shows the dimension
characters positioned along the sides of the triangle itself. The
default is standard dimensioning.
The default standout distances for the two types of dimensioning
are:
13mm line standout for standard dimensioning
4mm character standout for non-standard dimensioning
By default, skewbox triangles are highlighted by parallel-line
hatching with a spacing of 3mm between the hatching lines. The
hatching can be switched off, the spacing altered or an area of the
triangles selected for hatching.
Note that these standout distances may not be set to the same
value as other standout distances.

(continued)

2-142 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SKEWBOX (continued)

Figure 2-8 Overall and individual skewboxes.

Figure 2-9 Skewed and falling line with hatched triangle skewboxes.

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-143


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SKEWBOX (continued)

Examples:
SKEWBOX FULL Skews shown by full boxes
SKEWBOX TRIANGLE
Skews shown by triangles with standard dimen-sioning, 13mm
(default) standout for dimension lines, and hatching at 3mm
(default) spacing
SKEWBOX TRIANGLE NSTD HATCH OFF STANDOUT 7MM
Skews shown by triangles with non-standard dimensioning
(characters along triangle sides), a character standout of 7mm,
and no hatching
SKEWBOX TRIANGLE STANDOUT 20MM HATCH PART 25
Skews shown by triangles with standard dimensioning, a
dimensioning line standout of 20mm, and partial hatching at
standard spacing for a length of 25mm (being the maximum
height that the shading will reach).
SKEWBOX TRIANGLE TAGS ANGLES

25mm

Skews shown by triangles with standard dimen-sioning, 13mm


(default) standout for dimension lines, and hatching at 3mm
(default) spacing, with swing angles shown in the first corners

(continued)

2-144 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SKEWBOX (continued)

Related Commands:
FALLINGLINES FALLSKEWS OVERALLSKEWS DIMDISTANCE

Command Syntax:
>- SKEWbox -+-- FULL ----.
| |
- TRIangle -+- NSTD --. .------------------------------------------.
| |/ |
---------*- HATCH -+- <uval> -+- PART/IAL -+- <uval> -|
| | | | |
| | | - OFF ----|
| | | |
| | -----------------------|
| | |
| |-- OFF ---------------------------|
| | |
| |-- DEFault -----------------------|
| | |
| ----------------------------------|
| |
|-- STANdout --+-- <uval> -------------------|
| | |
| |-- DEFault ------------------|
| | |
| -----------------------------|
| |
|-- TAGS ------+-- ANGles --. |
| | | |
| |-- HV ------| |
| | | |
| |-- ON ------| |
| | | |
| -- OFF -----+----------------|
| |
--------------------------------------------+>

Querying: Q SKEWbox
Q OPTIONS

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-145


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SPECBREAK

Function: Specifies the level at which a change of pipeline specification is


noted, and which changes are recorded on the isometric.

Description: Pipeline specification changes are indicated by notes against the


corresponding points on the isometric plot. By default,
specification changes are noted at component level, but they can
be noted at Branch level instead.
SPECBREAK BRANCH causes only changes in the Branch
specification to be recognised.
SPECBREAK COMPONENT causes the Branch specification to be
ignored and changes to be recognised only in the component
attributes LSTUBE or SPREF, or in the Branch attribute
HSTUBE .
The format in which a specification change is shown is that both
the original and new specifications are shown at each point of
change. The format is similar to that used for dimensioning.
SPECBREAK can be further modified to output specification
changes for material, insulation, tracing, paint, and (up to) five
user-defined specifications. By default, only specification changes
for Pipe will be output. By switching SPECCHANGES to ON, you
can output the other changes.
The following Atext defaults are associated with the specification
breaks on the drawing area:

Specification Specification ATEXT Spec Break ATEXT


Pipeline name 288 PIPE 288 PIPE
Material spec 253 PIPING SPEC 289 MATL
Insulation spec 270 THERMAL INSULATION SPEC 290 INSUL
Tracing spec 271 TRACING SPEC 291 TRACE
Painting spec 272 PAINTING SPEC 292 PAINT
User defined 293 to 297 null 293 to 297 null string

(continued)

2-146 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SPECBREAK (continued)

Examples:
SPECB COMP
Recognises changes in component specifications only.
SPECB BRAN
Recognises changes in branch specifications only.
SPECB BRAN SPECC ON
Recognises changes in branch specifications only, and outputs
specification changes for insulation, tracing and paint.

Command Syntax:
>- SPECBreak -+- COMPonent* -.
| |
- BRANch -----+- SPECChanges -+- ON ---.
| | |
| - OFF* -+
| |
------------------------+->

Querying: Q SPECBreak
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-147


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SPLIT

Function: Controls the number of drawing sheets used when a pipeline is


split over more than one sheet.

Description: If a pipeline is too long or complex to fit on a single isometric plot,


ISODRAFT will automatically split the pipeline over separate
drawings. Each drawing will be identified as DRG 1 OF ..., DRG 2
OF ..., etc. You can control the relative complexity of each
drawing, or the number of drawings into which the isometric is to
be split, by using the SPLIT command.
You can control splitting either by giving a split factor, or by
specifying the number of drawings used for the isometric.
The default value of the split factor is 100. Note that this value
does not relate directly to either the number of fittings or the
amount of text on a sheet. It is a measure of the complexity of the
drawing, relative to its size, on an arbitrary scale.
Greater sheet complexity is specified by giving a split factor
greater than 100, and lower complexity by giving a split factor
less than 100.
You can control exactly where pipes are split by using Split
ATTAs in the design. If user-defined positions for splits have been
created in the design, ISODRAFT will always use these and not
calculate its own split points.
Split points in tube can be controlled by the TUBESPLITS
command.

Examples:
SPLIt 3 DRwgs
Splits the isometric into 3 drawings.
SPLIt 75 PERCent
Splits the isometric so that the complexity of each drawing is 75%
of the default.

Related Commands:
ERASE REPEATABILITY TUBESPLITS

Restrictions:
Only single pipelines can be split into a fixed number of drawings.
(continued)

2-148 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SPLIT (continued)

Command Syntax:

>--- SPLIt --- value ---+--- DRwgs -----.


| |
--- PERCent ---+--->
The default is 100 percent.

Querying: Q SPLIT
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-149


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SPOOLNUMBERS

Function: Specifies how individual pipe spools are identified on isometrics.

Description: SPOOLER can generate spool numbers per spool drawing. These
spool numbers are stored in the Fabrication DB and can be
imported into ISODRAFT by using the FROMDB command.
If you dont use the FROMDB option but switch spool numbering
on, ISODRAFT will number the spools. These numbers are not
maintained between sessions. The parameters that ISODRAFT
uses to number spools are as follows:
Spools are numbered sequentially from the start of the
pipeline. If a Tee is encountered, numbering continues down
the off-line leg before returning to the main line sequence.
Spools are identified on the isometric plot by spool numbers
plotted in square brackets, e.g. [8], on the first leg of a pipe.
They are also listed at the end of the material list.
By default, spools are numbered continuously from one
drawing to the next. The command SPOOLNUMBERS
PERDrawing causes spool numbering to be restarted at 1 on
each new drawing sheet. For details of how to plot pipe spools
on separate drawing sheets, see the ISOTYPE command.
The PREFIX option can be used to combine the spool numbers
with either user-specified text or the SPLP attribute of Pipe
and Drawing in DESIGN. ISODRAFT can insert generated
sheet and spool numbers into a user-defined spool name if
wildcard characters * are included in the text.

Examples:
SPOOLN FROMDB
The spool numbers generated in the SPOOLER module will be
used by ISODRAFT in the isometric plot and spool list.
SPOOLN PREF FROMDB
The spool numbers will be generated, with the prefix taken from
the DESIGN SPLP attribute.
SPOOLN ON Spool numbers are generated by ISODRAFT and
shown on the pipes and below the material list.

(continued)

2-150 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SPOOLNUMBERS (continued)

SPOOLN OFF
Spool numbers are not shown at all.
SPOOLN PREF Tube Spec: PERD
Spool numbers will be shown below the material list, and the
prefix will be included in all spool numbers in the drawing area.
Spool numbering will restart at 1 on each new drawing sheet.
SPOOLN PREF /PIPE1/DRE*/SPL*
Spool numbers will be shown below the material list, and the
sheet and spool numbers will be written into the prefix name. So,
for example, the identifier PIPE1/DRG2/SPL3 will be generated
automatically for spool 3 of drawing 2 of PIPE1. This format can
only be used with the SPOOLNUMBERS PERDRAWING option.

Related Commands:
ISOTYPE

Command Syntax:

>-- SPOOlnumbers --+-- PREFix - + - text----.


| | |
| - FROMDB -+- PERDrawing ---.
| | |
| ----------------|
| |
|-- PERDrawing -- +-- PREFix - + - text --|
| | | |
| | - FROMDB -|
| -----------------------|
| |
|-- FROMDB -------------------------------|
| |
|-- ON* ----------------------------------|
| |
-- OFF ----------------------------------+-->

* Spool numbers are generated for each isometric, with no relationship to


any data stored in the databases.

Restrictions: The maximum number of spools per pipe is 99.


The maximum length of the spool prefix is 40 characters.

Querying: Q SPOOLNumbers
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-151


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

STACKINGARRANGEMENT

Function: Positioning multiple plots on the paper.

Description: When you are using multiple plot files, you can specify the layout
of the individual plots on the paper. You can align the plots along
the paper, that is with their long sides parallel to the length of the
paper, or across the paper, that is with their short sides parallel
to the length of the paper. You can specify how many drawings
should be plotted in the given direction.
The default format is STACKINGARRANGEMENT 1 ALONG
which produces a single row of drawings with their long sides
aligned with the length of the paper.
Note that you must ensure that there is enough room across the
width of the paper for the arrangement you have specified. The
length of the paper is specified in the FILE command.
The stacking facility has no meaning, and is ignored, when single
plot files are used.

Examples:
STACK 2 ACROSS
will orientate the drawing frames across the width of the paper,
two abreast:

direction
of paper
movement

STACK 3 ALONG
will orientate the drawing frames along the width of the paper,
three high:

direction
of paper
movement

(continued)

2-152 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

STACKING ARRANGEMENT (continued)

Related Commands:
FILE SIZE

Command Syntax:

>--- STACkingarrangement --- value ---+--- ALONg ----.


| |
|--- ACROss ---|
| |
--------------+--->

Querying: Q STACkingarrangement
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-153


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SUPPORTFILENAME

Function: Specifies the name of a file to which a pipe support schedule is to


be sent.

Description: Specifies the name of a file to which a pipe support schedule is to


be sent. If the OVERWRITE option is included, any existing file of
the given name will be overwritten by the new schedule data.

Examples:
SUPPORTF /SUP1
Sends the pipe support schedule to a file named SUP1.
SUPPORTF /SUP1 OVER
Overwrites the pipe support schedule in the file SUP1.
SUPPORTF OFF
Stops the pipe support schedule being written to a file.

Command Syntax:

>--- SUPPORTFilename ---+--- name ---+--- OVERwrite ---.


| | |
| -----------------|
| |
--- OFF* ---------------------+--->

Restrictions:
For system isometrics, no information will be written to the
support file.

Querying: Q SUPPORTFilename
Q OPTions

2-154 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SUPPORTS

Function: Defines whether support positions are dimensioned as overall or


string dimensions, and whether supports are shown at all on the
isometric.

Description: Support positions may be dimensioned in one of two ways, overall


or string. The default is SUPPORTS STRING. Support
information can also be omitted completely from the isometrics.
Note that the position of support dimensions, that is whether they
are on the same side or the opposite side to the string or
composite dimensions, is controlled by the DIMENSIONS
HANGERS command.

Examples:
SUPPorts OVErall
Supports dimensioned from previous support.
SUPPorts STRing
Supports dimensioned from previous component.
SUPPorts OFF
No support information shown.

Related Commands:
DIMENSIONS DIMDIST

Command Syntax:

>--- SUPPorts ---+--- STRing* ---.


| |
|--- OVErall ---|
| |
--- OFF -------+--->

Querying: Q SUPPorts
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-155


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

SYMBOLFILENAME

Function: Specifies the name of a symbol library.

Description: The SYMBOLFILENAME command loads a file of user-defined


symbols previously created in PDMS DRAFT. You can define this
file as read-only if you want to protect the symbol definitions from
subsequent modification.

Examples:
SYMBOLF /SYMFILE1

Command Syntax:
>- SYMBOLFilename -+- filename -+- READONLY -.
| | |
| |- WRITE* ---|
| | |
| `------------+->
- OFF ->

Querying:

Q SYMBOLFilename
Lists the name and contents of the current symbol library. It will
not tell you what the listed symbols look like.

2-156 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

TAGGING

Function: Allows you to identify individual components on the isometric plot


by means of name tags.

Description: By default, component names are not plotted. Fittings of generic


type INST, VALV, FILT, PCOM, TRAP, VENT, VTWA and
VFWA can have their PDMS names (if they have them) shown
against their plotted symbols on the isometric.
If a component of a valid type exists in the pipeline but has not
been named when TAGGING ON is specified, ISODRAFT will
recognise that it has a system name only and will not plot any
name. However, if ITEMCODE ON has been specified the
component will be labelled with its itemcode.

Related Commands:
INSTNAME ITEMCODE

Command Syntax:

>--- TAGging ---+--- ON -----.


| |
--- OFF* ---+--->

Querying: Q TAGging
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-157


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

TAPPING

Function: Sets the scale of the tapping leg and switches tapping leg
dimensions and coordinates on and off.

Description: The TAPPING command controls the display and scale of tapping
branches, that is offline connections to PCOMs, SHUs, Flanges
and Filters.

Examples:
TAPping SCALe 75
Sets the scale of the tapping leg to 75% of the default value.
TAPping SCALe DEFault
Resets the default scale.
TAPping DIM ON
Switches tapping leg dimensions on.
TAPping DIM OFF
Switches tapping leg dimensions off.
TAPping DIM DEF
Reset to the default, which is dimensioning ON.
TAPping COORDS ON
Switches tapping leg coordinates on.
TAPping COOR OFF
Switches tapping leg coordinates off.
TAPping COORDS DEF
Resets to the default, which is coordinates off.
TAPping DEFault
Resets all tapping defaults, which sets the scale to 100%,
dimensioning to ON and plotting to OFF.

(continued)

2-158 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

TAPPING (continued)

Command Syntax:
.-------------------<----------------------.
/ |
>--- TAPping ---*--- SCALe ---+--- value -----. |
| | | |
| --- DEFault ---+--------------|
| |
|--- DIMensions -----. |
| | |
|--- COORdinates ----| |
| | |
|--- COORDS ---------+--- ON ----------------|
| | |
| |--- OFF ---------------|
| | |
| --- DEFault -----------|
| |
------------------------ DEFault -----------+--->

Querying: Q TAPPIng
Q OPTIONS

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-159


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

TEXTPOSITION

See POSITION command.

2-160 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

TITLEBLOCK

Function: Allows you to add extra text to the title block.

Description: The title block is produced automatically. Extra text can be added
to the title block by using the TITLEBLOCK command, followed by
the line number and the text to be added.
Title block lines can be input in any order.
You can underline a line of text by putting the _ character
(underscore) at the end of the line.
You can create a vertical bar from the previous horizontal line
down to the next horizontal line by putting the | character
(vertical bar) in the text.
ISODRAFT will accept a maximum of 25 title block lines. Each
line may contain up to 39 characters (including spaces, but
excluding the underscore character).

Examples: The following sequence will add the text illustrated below:
TITLE 1 THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE EXTRA
TITLE 2 TITLE BLOCK INFORMATION
TITLE 4 A VERTICAL LINE WITH |
TITLE 3 TO UNDERLINE USE THE UNDERSCORE _

THIS IS AN EXAMPLE OF THE EXTRA


TITLE BLOCK INFORMATION
TO UNDERLINE USE THE UNDERSCORE
A VERTICAL LINE WITH

DATE: 24 JUL 87
PROJECT NO: VC12
BATCH REF: A16 /OG8 /CG14
PIPING SPEC: PS20 ISS: 1
DRG NO
0-4201 1 OF 2

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-161


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

TITLEBLOCK (continued)

Related Commands:
DATE POSITION

Command Syntax:

>--- TITleblock --- value ---+--- text ---.


| |
-------------+--->

Querying: Q TITleblock
Q TITleblock value
Q OPTions

2-162 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

TOLERANCE

Function: Specifies the maximum misalignment between components


regarded as having the same axis.

Description: By default, two components will be plotted as though they have a


common axis if the orientation of their axes differs by less than
0.06 degrees, or if their axes are offset by less than 1.00 mm.
The TOLERANCE command allows you to specify a different
alignment tolerance, either as an angular difference or as a linear
offset.

Examples:
TOL OFFSET 0.125 INCH
Two components will be plotted as having a common axis if their
axes are offset by less than 0.125 inch.
TOL ANGLE 0.15
Two components will be plotted as having a common axis if the
orientations of their axes differ by less than 0.15 degrees.
TOL DEFAULT
Resets the default values of 1mm offset or 0.06 degrees angular
difference.

Restrictions:
If gaskets of less than 1 mm thickness are detailed, a tolerance
offset of less than the gasket thickness must be set.
Care should be taken when specifying non-default values, since
large tolerances can cause falling lines to be shown incorrectly.
For reliable plotting of falling and skewed lines, a lower value
than the default (say TOL OFF 0.01) may be appropriate.

Command Syntax:

>--- TOLerance ---+--- OFFset --- <uval> ---.


| |
|--- ANGle --- value -----|
| |
--- DEFault -------------+--->

Querying: Q TOLerance
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-163


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

TRACINGCONTROL

Function: Specifies whether or not tracing is to be plotted.

Description: Any piping component which has its TSPEC attribute set may be
shown traced.
Insulation and tracing can be shown:
On tubing only
On tubing and pipe components
By default, tracing is not identified on the isometric.
The name of the insulation and/or tracing specification will be
shown in the title block.

Examples:
TRAC ON
Shows tracing on the tube only, not on the pipe
TRAC TUBE
components.
TRAC ALL
Shows tracing on both tube and components.
TRAC OFF
Suppresses the display of tracing.
The default is TRACINGCONTROL TUBE.

Related Commands:
INSULATIONCONTROL

Command Syntax:
>------ TRACingcontrol -------+--- ON ------.
| |
|--- TUBE* ---|
| |
|--- ALL -----|
| |
--- OFF -----+--->

Querying: Q TRACingcontrol
Q OPTions

2-164 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

TRANSFERFILENAME

Function: Allows you to save a transfer file generated during ISODRAFTs


data extraction operations, for subsequent processing.

Description: The transfer file is not normally visible to you, but it can be copied
into an ASCII file by using the TRANsferfilename command.
Any transfer file which currently exists with the specified
filename will be overwritten by the new file resulting from the
next DETAIL or CHECK command.
Note that transfer files produced by versions of ISODRAFT before
Version 10.3 are in binary format and cannot be processed by the
PROCESS TRANSFERFILE command.

Examples:
TRANSFER /TRANS
Saves the transfer file as a file named TRANS.
TRANSFER OFF
No transfer file will be produced.

Related Commands:
PROCESS

Command Syntax:

>--- TRANsferfilename ---+--- filename ---.


| |
--- OFF --------+--->
where filename is the name of a file in your working directory.

Querying: Q TRANSferfilename
Q OPTIONS

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-165


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

TRUNCATE

Function: Stops rounding remainders of dimensioning being added to the


next dimension.

Description: When dimensioned isometrics are plotted, all dimensions are


rounded up or down to the nearest mm or 1/16 inch, depending on
the current output units. By default, ISODRAFT carries over any
remainder (positive or negative) from a rounded dimension and
adds it to the adjacent dimension. This process minimises
cumulative errors over a number of consecutive dimensions, but it
can result in identical fittings being shown with different lengths
(usually differing by 1mm or 1/16 inch).
You can specify that ISODRAFT is to truncate all dimensions.
The remainders from rounding of the individual dimensions will
then be discarded rather than added to the next dimension.
Remember that this can result in a significant cumulative error
over long pipelines with many individually dimensioned
components.

Examples:
TRUNcate ON Truncates dimensions.
TRUNcate OFF Does not truncate dimensions.
TRUNcate DEFault Does not truncate dimensions.

Command Syntax:
>--- TRUNcate ---+--- ON --------.
| |
|--- OFF* ------|
| |
--- DEFault ---+--->

Querying: Q TRUNcate
Q OPTIONS

2-166 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

TUBESPLITS

Function: Controls how splits in tube are placed.

Description: ISODRAFT may generate splits in tube. You can use the
TUBESPLITS command to output a message if this happens, or to
stop isometrics with splits in tube being produced.

Examples:
TUBES OFF
This command will allow generation of isometrics with splits in
tube, but the message UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT will be
displayed. Repeatability information will not be updated.
TUBES OFF NOP
Will prevent the generation of isometrics with splits in tube. The
message UNACCEPTABLE SPLIT POINT will be written to the
message file and the pipeline will be rejected. Repeatability
information will not be updated.
TUBES ON
Returns to the default condition of allowing splits in tube.

Command Syntax:
>--- TUBESplits ---+--- ON ----------------------.
| |
--- OFF ---+-----------------|
| |
--- NOPicture ---+--->

Querying: Q TUBESPLITS
Q OPTIONS

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-167


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

UNDERLAYPLOTNAME

Function: Allows you to plot ISODRAFTs output on top of background plots


previously created in a PDMS drawing module.

Description: You can superimpose an ISODRAFT plot file onto an underlay


plot. This facility is used, for example, for underprinting isometric
plots with company-standard drawing sheet information. You can
specify up to eight underlay plots, giving them numbers so that
they can be switched off if required.

Examples:
UNDERLAY /BKGRNDS/STYLE1
The drawing stored in the file /BKGRNDS/STYLE1 will be plotted
on the same sheet as the next isometric plot. By default, this will
be underlay number 1.
UNDERLAY /BKGRNDS/STYLE2 2
The drawing stored in file /BKGRNDS/STYLE2 will be plotted on
the same sheet as the next isometric plot.
UNDERLAY OFF
The plot given as underlay 1 will not be plotted with the next
isometric plot.
UNDERLAY OFF 2
The plot given as underlay 2 will not be plotted with the next
isometric plot.
UNDERLAY OFF ALL
No underlay will be plotted.

Related Commands:
MARGIN RESERVE

Command Syntax:
>--- UNDerlayplotname ---+--- filename ---+--- integer ---.
| | |
| ----------------|
| |
--- OFF ---------+--- integer ---|
| |
|--- ALL --------|
| |
----------------+--->

(continued)

2-168 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

UNDERLAYPLOTNAME (continued)

Restrictions: The underlay plots must have the same sheet size as that
specified for the ISODRAFT output. If not, the command will be
ignored.

Querying: Q UNDerlayplotname
Q UNDerlayplotname integer
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-169


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

UNITS

Function: Specifies units of measurement used for ISODRAFTs output.

Description: The units used for length and bore dimensions on isometric
drawings can be specified independently from the units used for
input data.
By default, lengths along pipelines (for component dimensioning,
tube lengths, etc.) are shown in metric units, and pipe bores are
shown in imperial units.
Note that input units are specified by the commands BORES and
DISTANCES.

Examples:
UNITS METRIC
Outputs metric lengths and metric bores.
UNITS IMPERIAL
Outputs imperial lengths and imperial bores. Measurements
between 1and 2will be output in inches; for example, 15.
UNITS IMPERIAL FT
Outputs imperial lengths and imperial bores. Measurements
between 1and 2will be output in feet and inches; for example,
13.
UNITS METIMP
Outputs metric lengths and imperial bores.

Related Commands:
BORES DISTANCES

Command Syntax:
>--- UNIts ---+--- METRic -----.
| |
|--- IMPerial ---+--- FT ---.
| | |
| ----------|
| |
--- METImp* ---------------+--->

Querying: Q OUTPut UNIts


Q OPTions
Note: Q UNITS gives the current units for input measurements
(see BORE and DISTANCE commands), not output measurements.

2-170 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

WASTAGE AREA

Function: Defines wastage areas which can be given different wastage


factors for cut pipe lengths.

Description: When cut pipe lengths are calculated, ISODRAFT can include
extra material to allow for wastage during cutting and fabrication.
A complete plant can be split up into a maximum of ten wastage
areas, numbered 0 to 9, and each wastage area can be allocated a
wastage factor.
Default values for the wastage factors for areas 19 are all 1.
The wastage factor for area 0 is fixed at 1 (i.e. no wastage
allowance).
ISODRAFT uses the wastage factors to modify the cut pipe
lengths as follows:
In the Design DB, the EREC attribute for a pipe branch can be
set to an integer, which corresponds to the wastage area for all
tube in the Branch. EREC=10 is treated as area 0, EREC=11
is treated as area 1, and so on.
Each tube item may have, included in its Specification, a
standard wastage allowance (PWAS) in the form of an added
percentage.
When calculating a cut pipe length, ISODRAFT multiplies the
standard wastage allowance (PWAS) for the appropriate type
of tube by the wastage factor for the area in which the length
occurs (determined by the EREC for the branch).
The corrected percentage allowance thus calculated is then
added to the nominal length of the pipe to give the cut length
which is plotted on the drawing.
Note that a cut pipe list is only output if you have given the
CUTTINGLIST command.

(continued)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-171


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

WASTAGEAREA (continued)

Examples: Consider a length of pipe connecting two components whose


separation measured along the pipe centreline is 1000mm.
Assume that the tube specification has PWAS set to 10; that is, a
10% allowance is preset. Assume that the pipe length forms part
of a branch for which the EREC attribute has been set to 3.
Assume that the wastage factor for wastage area 3 has been set to
1.2 by using the command
WASTAGE AREA 3 1.2
Then the wastage allowance calculated by ISODRAFT will be
(1000 x 10% x 1.2) mm, i.e. 120mm, and the cut pipe length given
on the isometric will be 1120mm.

Command Syntax:
.-------------<----------.
/ |
>--- WASTage ---*--- ARea integer value ---+--->

Restrictions:
ISODRAFT only includes a wastage allowance if WASTAGE AREA
has been set. The default is for no allowance, even if PWAS has
been set.

Querying: Q WASTage
Q WASTage integer shows value for the area number
queried
Q OPTIONS

2-172 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

WELDID

Function: Allows you to identify individual welds on the isometric by name.

Description: Welds which have their NAME attribute set in the Design
database can have their names plotted against their symbols on
the isometric.
By default, weld names are not shown on the isometric plot.

Related Commands:
TAGGING WELDNUMBERS WELDTYPE

Command Syntax:

>--- WELDId ---+--- ON -----.


| |
--- OFF* ---+--->

Querying: Q WELDId
Q OPTions

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-173


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

WELDNUMBERS

Function: Numbering the welds on an isometric.

Description: The SPOOLER module allows you to set weld numbers


automatically, and store these numbers in the Design DB. If this
feature is used it applies to an individual pipe, individual branch
or to a spool drawing as defined in the SPOOLER module.
The WELDNUMBERS FROMDB command allows you to access
these numbers from the Design DB. When using this feature, if
ISODRAFT finds any unnumbered welds it displays an error
message and halts the drawing of the isometric.
If the weld numbering feature of DESIGN or SPOOLER has not
been used, ISODRAFT can produce weld numbers according to its
own system defaults. However, these numbers are not maintained
between revisions.
Whether you generate weld numbers in DESIGN, SPOOLER or in
ISODRAFT, the size of the weld number characters can be
specified using the CHARHeight setting. A table of the weld
numbers can also be output onto the drawing sheet. The type of
weld to be numbered can be fabrication only, erection only, or
both. Weld numbering can be switched off completely, which is
the default.
Additional welds can be shown on the isometric either in
individual balloons or, if there are more than a specified number
of them, as an arrowed message in a single ellipse (with the
numbers separated by slashes).
Note that if you used the SPOOLER module to generate weld
numbers, you can output a weld table on the isometric to your
own specifications using the POSITION command. For generated
weld numbers, the table has a fixed position and content.

Examples:
WELDN CHARH 1.5 FAB
Outputs fabrication weld numbers with a character height of 1.5
mm.
WELDN CHARH 1.8 EREC BOX
Outputs erection weld numbers with a character height of 1.8
mm, and tabulates them in a box immediately above the title
block.
(continued)

2-174 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

WELDNUMBERS (continued)

WELDN CHARH 2.0 BOX


Outputs all weld numbers with a character height of 2.0 mm in a
table.
WELDN OFF Suppresses the output of weld numbers.
WELDN FAB FROMDB
Outputs fabrication weld numbers from the Design DB.
WELD CHARH 2 FAB AWELD BALLO 6
Output includes numbers for additional fabrication welds. These
will be shown in separate balloons if there are no more than 6,
otherwise they will be shown together in an ellipse.

Related Commands:
POSITION WELDID WELDTYPE

Command Syntax:
>- WELDNumbers -+- OFF ----------.
| |
|- ON -----------|
| |
CHARH- value -+- FABricationonly -.
| |
|- ERECtiononly ----|
| |
-------------------+- GENerated -.
| |
|- FROMDB ----|
| |
-------------+
|- NOBOX -.
| |
|- BOX ---|
| |
---------+--.
|
.----------------------------------<--------------------------------------'
|
`--+- AWELD -+- BALLOon value -.
| | |
| |- ELLIPse -------|
| | |
| `- OFF -----------+
| |
`---------------------------+->

Querying: Q WELDNumbers
Q OPTIONS

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-175


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

WELDTYPE

Function: Controls which types of end connection are to be shown on


isometric drawings.

Description: By default, all types of end connection are shown on isometrics.


The WELDTYPE command specifies whether all end connections,
no end connections, only shop status end connections or only site
status end connections will be shown.

Examples:
WELDType FABrication
Only shop status end connections will be shown.
WELDType SITE
Only site status end connections will be shown.
WELDType ON
All types of end connection will be shown.
WELDType OFF
No end connections will be shown.
WELDType FORCesite
Shows all end connections as if they were shop status end
connections. For example, force site welds will be shown as
fabrication welds.

Command Syntax:

>--- WELDType ---+--- ON* -----------.


| |
|--- OFF -----------|
| |
|--- SITE ----------|
| |
|--- FABrication ---|
| |
--- FORCesite -----+--->

Querying: Q WELDType
Q OPTIONS

2-176 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Command Reference Section

ZEROLENGTHSKEWS

Function: Allows you to connect a vertical Branch to a falling line.


When modelling falling lines containing Butt Weld Tees or Olets,
you can position a zero-length variable-angle bend at the offline p-
point of each Tee or Olet.

Description: If falling lines containing Butt Weld Tees or Olets are modelled
with zero-length variable-angle bends at the offline p-point of
each Tee or Olet, you can connect a vertical Branch. The
ZEROLENGTHSKEWS command suppresses dimensioning
skewboxes for Butt Weld Tees or Olets in falling lines if zero-
length bends have been included in the model.
Bends at Tees or Olets will only be considered as zero-length if
they are less than 0.5mm long. Bends with dimensions greater
than this will be detailed as normal components.

Examples:
ZEROlengthskews ON
Output skewboxes at vertical connections to falling lines.
ZEROlengthskews OFF
Suppress skewboxes at vertical connections to falling lines.

Related Commands:
FALLINGLINES

Command Syntax:
>--- ZEROlengthskews ---+--- ON* ---.
| |
--- OFF ---+--->

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 2-177


Version 11.6
3 Symbol Keys

Note: How to define symbol keys is described in Chapter 10 of the VANTAGE


PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide.

3.1 Introduction

This appendix lists the symbol key (i.e. the SKEY text attribute) and the plotted symbol
used to identify each type of component on isometric drawings. There is a section for
each generic type. The sections are in alphabetic order of generic type:
BEND (see ELBOw) See Section 5.
CAP See Section 3.2.
CLOSure See Section 3.3.
COUPling See Section 3.4.
CROSs See Section 3.5.
ELBOw See Section 5.
FBLInd (Blind Flange) See Section 3.6.
FILTer See Section 3.7.
FLANge See Section 3.8.
FTUBe (Fixed-length Tube) See Section 3.9.
INSTrument See Section 3.10.
LJSEnd (Lap Joint, Stub End) See Section 3.11.
OLET (see TEE) See Section 3.15.
PCOMponent (Pipe Component) See Section 3.12.
REDUcer See Section 3.13.
SHU See Section 3.14.
TEE See Section 3.15.
TRAP See Section 3.17.
UNIOn See Section 3.17.
VALVe See Section 3.18.
VENT See Section 3.20.
VFWAy (Four-way Valve) See Section 3.21.
VTWAy (Three-way valve) See Section 3.22.
WELD See Section 3.23.
FLOR (Pipe through floor) See Section 3.24.
Section 3.25 is an alphabetical list of symbol keys cross-referenced to the generic types
of the components to which they refer.

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-1


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

The following information is given for each SKEY:


Component description The actual component description
SKEY A four-letter identifier
Plotted symbol The symbol plotted on isometrics, plus dimensions (in
mm)
P-points The position and direction of the P-points with respect to
the plotted symbol. P-points needed to specify
components fully are shown against the symbols. P-
points which are optional are not shown, but their
effects are explained in the notes when appropriate.
Notes The numbers in the right-hand column refer to the notes
at the end of each section.

3.1.1 P-points
When you define piping components in PARAGON, you must remember the following
rules so that ISODRAFT can produce isometrics correctly:
P0 is automatically set and defines the origin of the component.
For two-way components, the arrive and leave p-points must be numbered P1 and
P2 (not necessarily in that order). For two-way valves, the spindle direction must be
indicated by P3.
For three-way components, the offline leg must be indicated by P3. The spindle
direction for three-way valves must be specified by using a p-point greater than P3,
which must have its bore unset.
For four-way components, the two straight-through flows must have p-points P1/P2
and P3/P4. The spindle direction for four-way valves must be specified by using a p-
point greater than P4, which must have its bore unset.
For eccentric reducers without a connection point, the flat side must be indicated by
P3. Eccentric reducers with a connection point must use P3, with a valid bore set, to
indicate the connection point and must use P9, with bore unset, for orientation of the
flat side.
For U-bends (defined as bends of more than 135 degrees), the p-points must be set as
shown for each symbol.

3-2 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.2 CAP Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

5.5
Cap - Butt Weld KAB 1 0 2 1
W
3.5

3.75
Cap - KACP 1 0 2 1
Compression
2.0

Cap - Screwed KASC 3.5


1 0 2 1

1.5

3 .5 D
Cap - Socket KASW 1 0 2

Weld
1 .5

Notes:
1. The p-point configurations refer only to Caps used solely for blanking and are
positioned on the axis of the appropriate face (depending on type). Caps with
different p-point configurations, such as flipped Caps (where P1 is Pleave and P2 is
Parrive) or Caps used as Reducers, can result in incorrect output.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-3


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.3 CLOS Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

Pipe Block PF 4.75


0

Fixed Length 1 2

2.5

Pipe Block PV 4.5 0

Variable Length 1 2

2.5

3-4 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.4 COUP Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

Nipple - Screwed NRSC 2.0 0


1 2
4.0

Nipple - Screwed NBSC 1.0 2.5 0


1 2

4.0

1.5

0
Coupling - COCP 3.5
1 2
Compression 3.5

2 2

2.5

0
Coupling - Screwed COSC 3.5
1 2

2 2

2.5

Coupling - Socket COSW 0


3.5 D D
Weld 1 2

2 2

8.0
6.5 ) 1.5
Butt Weld Elbolet CEBW ( 0 1
1 2

8.0
6.5 D ) 1.5
(
Socket Weld Elbolet CESW 0 1
1 2

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-5


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.4 COUP Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

8.0 0
Screwed Elbolet CESC 6.5 )
( 1.5 1 2
1

Notes:
1. The dimensions of these components depend upon plotted leg length. The default
plotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using the
LEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.

3-6 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.5 CROS Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

Cross - Butt Weld CRBW 2


1 2
0
4

Cross - Socket Weld CRSW 2


1 2
0
4

Cross - Compression CRCP 2


1 2
0
4

Cross - Flanged CRFL 2


1 2
0
4

Cross - Screwed CRSC 2


1 2
0
4

3
) )
Cross - Set on CRSO 1, 2
1 0 2
( (
4

REINFORCED
3
Cross - Set on ) )
CRRF 1,2
1 0 2
( (
Reinforced 4

3
3,4,5
Cross - Generic Y- VARIABLE

X@**
ANGLE 1 2
0
type with variable 4
angle out- and off-
legs VARIABLE
ANGLE
VARIABLE
ANGLE

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-7


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.5 CROS Symbol Keys (continued)

Notes:
1. The positions of P3 and P4 along the vertical axis are important for deriving correct
cut pipe lengths. The vertical displacements of P3 and P4 are determined by the
points at which the offline legs intersect the main line. P0, P1, P2, P3 and P4 will be
coincident when the offline leg has the same bore as the main line.
2. The dimensions of all Cross components depend upon plotted leg length. The default
plotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using the
LEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.
3. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
4. The @ character in the symbol key is replaced automatically by an integer in the
range 1 to 4, depending on the relative bore size of the connections, with 1 assigned
to the largest bore. It is important to note the bore size if redefining the SKEYS for
X1**, X2**, X3** or X4**.
5. Flanged connections on generic Y-type fittings are represented on the isometric on
the tube only. This is due to the fact that the y-type fitting is user-definable and
flanged representation on the component cannot be enforced.

3-8 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys


Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes
Description
1
0
Elbow - Butt Weld ELBW 1,9
(90 and 45 degree) 2

Elbow - Butt Weld ETBW 1,5,9


with a Connection 2

(90 and 45 degree)


3 1

Elbow - Butt Weld EUBW 4 3 5


2,9
180 degree Return 1 0 2
(U Elbow)
1
0
Elbow Compression ELCP 1,9
(90 and 45 degree) 2

Elbow Compression ETCP 1,5,9


with a Connection 2
) )
(90 and 45 degree) ( (
3 0 1

Elbow - Screwed EBSC 1


0
1,9
with Male Ends
(90 and 45 degree) 2

Elbow - Screwed ELSC


with Female Ends
(90 and 45 degrees)
1,9

Elbow - Screwed - ETSC 1,5,9


Female with a 2
) )
Connection ( (
(90 and 45 degree)
3 0 1

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-9


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.6 ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
1
0
Elbow - Socket Weld ELSW 1,9
2

Elbow - Socket Weld ETSW 2


1,5,9
with a Connection ) )
( ( 3 0 1

( 1
0
)
Elbow - Reducing ER** 1,6
2

1
0
Bend - Flanged BEFL 1,9
(all angles) 2

Bend - Flanged BTFL 1,5,9


with a Connection 2

(all angles) ) )
( ( 3 0 1

Bend - Flanged BUFL 4 3 5 2,9


180 degree Return 1 0 2
(U Bend)

1
0

Bend - Mitre MIFL 1,9


2

Flanged Bend - Mitre MTFL 1,5,9


with a Connection 2

Flanged
3 0 1

3-10 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.6 ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
1
0

Bend - Mitre MIBW 1,7,9


2

1
0

Bend - Mitre MIPL 1,8,9


2

Butt Weld Bend -


Mitre with a 2
MTBW 1,5,9
Connection
0 3 1

Butt Weld Bend -


Mitre with a 2
MTPL 1,5,9
Connection
0 3 1

1
0
Bend - Lobster Back
L@FL 1,3,9
Flanged 2

Bend - Lobster Back


with a Connection 2
T@FL 1,3,5,9
Flanged
3 0 1

1
0
Bend - Lobster Back
L@BW 1,3,9
Butt Weld 2

1
0

Lobster Back Bend L@PL 1,3,8,9


2

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-11


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.6 ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

Bend - Lobster Back 2


T@BW 1,3,5,9
with a Connection
0 3 1

Bend - Lobster Back 2


T@PL 1,3,5,9
with a Connection
0 3 1

1
0
Bend - Pulled
PB+D 1,4,9
(All Angles) 2

Bend - Pulled 4 3 5

180 degree Return


BU+D 1 0 2 2,4,9
(U Bend)

Bend - Pulled with a


Connection 2
TB+D 1,4,5,9
(All Angles)
0 3 1

Notes:
1. Generic types ELBO and BEND have a connection reference to facilitate connections
to the elbow or bend. ISODRAFT will always treat an elbow or bend as having an
offline leg if it has a P3 with a bore greater than zero. Care is needed when selecting
a symbol key and point set in order to achieve the required results.
2. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following diagram
and P3 should not have its bore set.
5
2

0 3

3-12 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.6 ELBO or BEND Symbol Keys (continued)

3. Replace the @ character in the symbol key with an integer (1 to 9) denoting the
number of segments.
4. Replace the + character in the symbol key with an integer (1 to 9) denoting the ratio
of the bend radius to the pipe bore.
5. The p-point for the offline connection (P3) can be positioned anywhere along the
horizontal (P1) axis that suits your specific component design.
6. Reducing elbows can have any of the end types BW, CP, FL, SC, or SW, but not PL.
7. This type of component is treated as a fitting in the material list.
8. This type of component is treated as tube in the material list.
9. The dimensions of all Elbow and Bend components depend upon plotted leg length.
The default plotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using
the LEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-13


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.6 FBLI Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

4.5
Flange - Blind FLBL 1 0 2

2.5

4.5 ) 0
Flange - Reducing FLRC ( 1
1 2
Concentric
1.0

1 0
4.5 )
Flange - Reducing FLRE ( 3 2 1,2
Eccentric
1.0

Notes:
1. Reducing flanges will have clarifying text plotted on the isometric drawing to
highlight their presence.
2. P3 is used only for orientation and will have its bore unset.

3-14 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.7 FILT Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

0
Filter/Strainer - 4.5
FI** 1
Straight Through 8.0 1 2

9.0
0
Filter/Strainer - 2
FA** 1,2
1
9.0
Angle 4.5

8.0

1
6.0
Filter/Strainer -
FO** 6.0
1,3,5
Offset 3 2
8.0

Filter/Strainer - 4.5
FR** 3
1,4
Return 2

1
8.0

Notes:
6. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-15


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.8 FILT Symbol Keys (continued)

7. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following
diagram:

P0
P2

P1

8. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following
diagram:

P0

P2
P1
P1 P0

P3 P3 P2

Plan

P1 P0
P0 P1

P2 P3 P2
P3

End Side
Note that the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0, P1, P2 and P3 may be coplanar.

3-16 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.8 FILT Symbol Keys (continued)

9. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following
diagram:

P2
P3

P0 P1

Note that P3 is used only for orientation purposes and will have its bore unset. The
horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0 and P1(and similarly P2 and P3) may be coincident.
10. Generic type FILT has a connection reference to facilitate connections to reducers.
If the connection facility is not being used, then an eccentric reducer will have a p-
arrive, a p-leave, and a P3 to orientate the flat side.
If the connection facility is to be used, P3 will be the connection p-point and as such
must have valid bore and orientation data for the connection. As the flat side can be
either in the same direction as the connection or directly opposite, a P9 p-point must be
used to give the orientation of the flat side.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-17


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.8 FLAN Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

5.0
Flange - Blind FLBL 1 0 2

1.0

1.0

Flange -Flared/Loose FLFL 1


1 0 2
Backing 3.5 )
( 5.0

1.0

Flange - Backing FLLB 3.5 ) 5.0


1 0 2 2
(

)
Flange - Reducing 5.0 ( 0
FLRC 3
Concentric 1 2

1.0
0
)
Flange - Reducing 5.0 ( 1 2
FLRE 3
Eccentric
3

1.0

2.0

0
Flange - Screwed FLSC 5.0 3.5
)
(
1 2

1.0

5.0 )
(
Flange - Slip On FLSO 0

1 2

1.0

)
Flange - Slip On with 5.5 (
FLSJ 1
0

J Type Weld 1 2

1.0

3-18 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.9 FLAN Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

)
4
5.5 (
Flange - Orifice Slip FOSO 3

On 0 1 2

1.0

) 0
5.5 3.5 (
Flange - Socket Weld FLSW 1 2

1.0 2.0

) 0
5.5 (
Flange - Weld Neck FLWN 1 2

4.0

)
5.5 (
Flange - Orifice Weld FOWN 3
4
Neck 0 1 2

1.0 3.0

Notes:
1. To allow for the amount of pipe that normally passes through the component before
cutting or grinding off, a cutting allowance is included if the LOOSE attribute of the
flange is set to TRUE. This allowance is determined by the value of the ALLO
attribute, if set. If the ALLO attribute is not set (or set to zero), the allowance will
default to 150mm. However, this default value can be altered by the
LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE command.
2. The system used by previous version of the software (using intuitive P3 points) is
still supported.
3. To be used in conjunction with LJSE symbols FLRG or FLSE.
4. Reducing flanges will have clarifying text plotted on the isometric drawing to
highlight their presence.
5. Orifice flanges will have clarifying text plotted on the isometric drawing to highlight
their presence.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-19


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.9 FTUB Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
Fixed Length Pipe - FPFL 0
1
With flanged ends
1 2

Fixed Length Pipe - FPPL 0

2.0
Without flanged ends
1 2

4.0

Fixed Length Pipe - TUBE 0

to be displayed and
1 2

stretched, like implied


tube on an isometric
Note:
1. The dimensions of all piping components depend upon plotted leg length. The default
plotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using the
LEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.

3-20 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.10 INST Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
Instrument II** 4.5 0 1,5
1 2

8.0

9.0
2
Instrument - Angle IA** 4.0
9.0
0
1
1,2,5

4.0

0
1
4.5
Instrument - Offset IO** 1,3
3 2
8.0

8.0
3
Instrument - Return IR** 2 1,4
4.5 1
0

6.5 DIA
2
Instrument - Dial IDPL 6
3
0
3.0 1

6.5 DIA
Instrument - Dial 3 2
IDFL 0 6
Flanged 3.0 1

0.25

5.5 0
3.0
Orifice Plate OP 1 2

3.0

1.0 5.5 0
Restrictor Plate RP 1 2

3.0

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-21


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.11 INST Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
0
4.5
1 2
Rupture Disk DR 2.5 2.0

3.5

2.5

4.5
Valve - Angle 4.0 03
RA** 2 1,5
Relief/Vent 8.0 1

4.75

2.5

4.5
Valve - Angle
XA** 4.0 2
03
1,5
Pressure Reducing 8.0 1

4.75

4.0
1.5
Valve Control CV** 2.0 1,5
4.0 1 03 2

6.5

4.0
2.0
2.5
Valve - Angle Control CA** 4.0 2
03
1,5
1

3.25

4.75

4.0
1.75

Valve - 3 Way Control 2.25


C3** 4.0
1
0 4
1,5
9.25 3 2
4.75

4.75

3-22 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.11 INST Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
9.25

Valve - 4 Way Control 4


C4** 4.0 05 1,5
1 3 2
8.0

4.75

4.5

Valve - Control Square 2.0


SV** 1,5
Indicator 4.0
3.5
1 03 2

14.0

4.5

Valve - Angle Control 2.0


SA** 03 1,3
Square Indicator 4.0
1
2
8.0

4.5

Valve - 3 Way Control


2.0
3.75 4
Square Indicator S3** 4.0
1 0 2
3
1,5

4.75

9.25
Valve - 4 Way Control 3
4.0
Square Indicator S4** 8.0 1
0
2 1,5
4

4.75

4.0
Valve - Control
MV** 2.5 1,5
Motorised Indicator 4.0 1 0 3 2

6.5

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-23


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.11 INST Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

4.0
2.5
4.0 03
Valve - Angle Control 1
MA** 1,5
Motorised Indicator 8.0 2
6.5

4.5

4.0
2.5 4
4.0
Valve- 3 Way Control 0
M3** 1,5
1 2
3
Motorised Indicator 9.25
8.0

4.75

9.25

Valve- 4 Way Control


M4** 1,5
3
4.0
Motorised Indicator 8.0 1
0
4
2

4.75

4.0

3.0
Valve - Control
HV** 2.0
1,5
Hand Indicator 4.0 1 03 2

6.5

4.0

3.0
Valve - Angle Control 2.0
HA** 4.0 3
1,5
Hand Indicator 1 0
2
8.0
9.25

4.75

3-24 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.11 INST Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
4.0

3.25
4
2.75
Valve - 3Way Control 4.0 0
H3** 1
3
2
1,5
Hand Indicator 9.25
8.0

4.75

9.25

3
Valve - 4Way Control 4.0
H4** 1
0
2 1,5
Hand Indicator 8.0 4

4.75

3.0

Valve - Pressure 4.0


XV** 1,5
Reducing 4.0 2.5 1 03 2

5.75 3.5

3.5

Valve - Relief/Vent RV** 4.0


4.0
1,5
1 03 2

9.25

Notes:
1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-25


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.11 INST Symbol Keys (continued)

2. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following
diagram:

P0
P2

P1
3. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following
diagram:

P0

P2
P1
P1 P0

P3 P3 P2

Plan

P1 P0
P0 P1

P2 P3 P2
P3

End Side

Note that the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0, P1, P2 and P3 may be
coplanar.

3-26 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.11 INST Symbol Keys (continued)

4. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following
diagram:

P2
P3

P0 P1

Note that the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0 and P1 (and similarly P2 and
P3) may be coincident.
5. If an orientation p-point (P3) is present in the point set and is oriented away from
the XYZ axes, then the orientation of this p-point will be shown on the isometric.
6. Instrument dials can have a P3 with an unset bore for orienting the dial. This p-
point will normally be positioned perpendicular to the dial face, on the dial axis. A
message will be output near the component showing the orientation of P3.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-27


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.11 LJSE Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
1.0

Lap Joint
FLRG 1
Ring Loose 2.5
)
( 5.0 1 0 2

1.0

Lap Joint
FLSE 1
Stub End Loose )
2.5 ( 5.5 10 2

Note:
1. To be used in conjunction with FLAN symbol FLLB.

3-28 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.12 PCOM Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
9.0

2
4.5 0
9.0
Block - Angle BA** 1
1,2

4.5

8.0

0
Block - Offset BO** 6.0 1 1,3
8.0
5.5 3 2

5.5

Block - Return BR** 2


3
1,4
21.5 26
0
1

0.7
3.4
Expansion Bellows EX** 01 2
1
5.6

5.5

Flame Trap FT** 5.0


1
01 2

9.0

2
0
4.5
9.0 1
Block - Angle BA** 1,2

4.5

5.5
Flexible Hose FX** 1
2.5 01 2

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-29


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.13 PCOM Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
4.5

Hose Coupling CH** 1


2.5
01 2

4.5
Non-category Item NC** 1
2.5
01 2

2.0 1.5

Plug PL
3.0 2.5
1 0 2

3.0

Restrictor Plate RP
5.5 1.0 01 2

5.5

Sight Glass SG** 5.5


1 0 2
1,5

4.4

2.25

2.25
Slip Plate SP 7.0
3
5,6
10 2

1.25

2.25

2.25
Slip Ring SR 7.0 3
5,6
10 2

1.25

3-30 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.13 PCOM Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
2.25

4.50
Spectacle Blind SB 3
5,6
6.0
10 2

1.25

4.0
2
Tundish (Funnel) TU** 5.0 1
8.0 0 1
3.0

Notes
1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
2. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following
diagram:

P0
P2

P1

To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following
diagram:

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-31


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.13 PCOM Symbol Keys (continued)

P0

P2
P1
P1 P0

P3 P3 P2

Plan

P1 P0
P0 P1

P2 P3 P2
P3

End Side
Note that the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0, P1, P2 and P3 may be coplanar.
3. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following
diagram:

P2
P3

P0 P1

Note that the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0 and P1 (and similarly P2 and P3)
may be coincident.
4. If an orientation p-point is present in the point set, the orientation of this p-point
will be shown on the isometric.
5. The p-point set shown represents a typical arrangement for positioning and
orienting the component, but is not mandatory.

3-32 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.13 REDU Symbol Keys

3.13.1 Concentric Reducers


Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes
Description
5.5

Reducer - Concentric
RCBW 3.5 () () 0.75 1
Butt Weld 01 2

6.5

Reducer - Concentric
CPBW 3.5 () () 1.0 1
Fabricated from Plate 01 2

6.5

Reducer - Concentric
CSBW 3.5 () () 1.0 1
Swaged from Pipe 01 2

Reducer - Concentric 6.5

with a Connection CTBW 3.5 () () 1.0 3 1


Butt Weld 01 2

Reducer - Concentric 6.5

with a Connection CZBW 3.5 () () 1.0 3 1


Fabricated from Plate 01 2

Reducer - Concentric 6.5

with a Connection CXBW 3.5 () () 1.0 3 1


Swaged from Pipe 01 2

5.5

Reducer - Concentric
RCCP 1
4.0 3.0

Compression 01 2

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-33


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.14.1 REDU - concentric (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
5.5

Reducer - Concentric
RCFL 1
Flanged 3.5 4.5
01 2

Reducer - Concentric 5.5

Fabricated from Plate


CPFL 1
Flanged 3.5 4.5
01 2

Reducer - Concentric 5.5

Swaged from Pipe


CSFL 1
Flanged 3.5 4.5
01 2

Reducer - Concentric 5.5

with a Connection
CTFL 3
1
Flanged 3.5 4.5
1 0 2

Reducer - Concentric 5.5

with a Connection
CZFL 3
1
Fabricated from Plate 3.5 4.5

Flanged
1 0 2

Reducer - Concentric 5.5

with a Connection
CXFL 3
1
Swaged from Pipe 3.5 4.5

Flanged
1 0 2

Reducer - Concentric RNSC 6.5

Nipple
3.5 1.0
1
1 0 2

Reducer - Concentric RCSC 5.5

Screwed 3.5 1.0 1


1 0 2

3-34 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.14.1 REDU - concentric (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
Reducer - Concentric 6.5

with a Screwed
CTSC 3.5 1.0
3
1
Connection
1 0 2

6.5

Reducer - Concentric
RCSW 3.5 1.0 1
Socket Weld 1 0 2

Reducer - Concentric 6.5

with a Connection 3
CTSW 3.5 1.0 1
Socket Weld 1 0 2

6.5

Reducer - Concentric
RBSW 3.5 1.0 1
Socket Weld Bush 1 0 2

Special Reducing RF 3.25

Flange
1
4.75 1.0 1 0 2

Notes:
1. A concentric reducer with a connection point will have an additional p-point, P3,
with a valid bore. A concentric reducer without a connection will have only a p-arrive
and p-leave, as shown.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-35


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.13.2 Eccentric Reducers


Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes
Description
5.5

Reducer - Eccentric )
REBW 1,2
5.5 ( )
( 2.0
Butt Weld
1 0 2

5.5

Reducer - Eccentric )
EPBW 1,2
5.5 ( )
( 2.0
Fabricated from Plate
1 0 2

5.5

Reducer - Eccentric )
ESBW 1
5.5 ( )
( 2.0
Swaged from Pipe 1 0 2

Reducer - Eccentric 6.5

with a Connection
OTBW 5.5
3
1,2
Butt Weld 2.0
10 2
9

Reducer - Eccentric 6.5

with a Connection
EZBW 5.5
3
1,2
Fabricated from Plate 2.0
10 2
9

Reducer - Eccentric 6.5

with a Connection
EXBW 5.5
3
1,2
Swaged from Pipe 2.0
10 2
9

6.5

Reducer - Eccentric
RESC 5.5 1
Screwed 2.0
10 3
2

Reducer - Eccentric 5.5


3
with a Connection OTSC 5.5 (
)
(
) 2.0
1,2
Screwed
10 2
9

3-36 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.14.2 REDU - eccentric (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

Reducer - Eccentric 4.8


1.5
REFL 10 2 1,2
Flanged 5.6
3

Reducer - Eccentric
Fabricated from Plate EPFL 4.8
1.5
10 2
1,2
Flanged 5.6
3

Reducer - Eccentric
Swaged from Pipe ESFL 4.8
1.5
10 2
1,2
Flanged 5.6
3

Reducer - Eccentric OTFL 3


1,2
with a Connection 4.8
1.5

Flanged
10 2
5.6 9

Reducer - Eccentric EZFL 3


1,2
with a Connection 4.8
1.5

Fabricated from Plate


10 2
5.6 9

Flanged

Reducer - Eccentric EXFL 3


1,2
with a Connection 4.8
1.5

Swaged from Pipe


10 2
5.6 9

Flanged

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-37


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.14.2 REDU - eccentric (continued)

Notes:
1. Generic type REDU has a connection reference to facilitate connections to reducers.
If the connection facility is not being used, then an eccentric reducer will have a p-
arrive, a p-leave, and a P3 to orientate the flat side.
If the connection facility is to be used, P3 will be the connection p-point and as such
must have valid bore and orientation data for the connection. As the flat side can be
either in the same direction as the connection or directly opposite, a P9 p-point must
be used to give the orientation of the flat side.
2. If an orientation p-point is present in the point set, the orientation of this p-point
will be shown on the isometric.

3-38 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.14 SHU Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
6.5

Non-Category Item NC**


4.5 1,2
1 0 2

Notes:
1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
2. SHU elements have a CRFA attribute allowing up to 10 connection points.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-39


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.15 TEE or OLET Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
Olet - Half Coupling
e.g. Screwed (Picture 3
shows screwed but can HC** ) ) 3.0
( (
be any connection 1 0 2

type) 3.0

Olet - Half Coupling


HC** 3.0 3
e.g. Socket Weld () ()
1 0 2
3.0

Olet - Latrolet 3.2 3


LA**
e.g. Butt Weld () ()
1 0 2

4.8

Olet - Latrolet 3.2 3


LA**
e.g. Screwed () ()
1 0 2

4.8

Olet - Latrolet 3.2 3


LA**
e.g. Socket Weld () ()
1 0 2

4.8

1.0

Olet - Nipolet
NI**
e.g. Screwed 3
5.0
() ()
1 0 2
3.5

1.0

Olet - Nipolet
NI**
e.g. Plain Ended 5.0
3

) )
( ( 1 0 2
4.0

3-40 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.16 TEE or OLET Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

4.0
Olet - Sockolet SK** () () 3

1 0 2
5.5

4.0
Olet - Sweepolet SW** () () 3

1 0 2
5.5

3.5

Olet - Thredolet TH**


3
4.0
) )
( ( 1 0 2

5.5

3.5

Olet - Weldolet WT**


3
4.0
) )
( ( 1 0 2

5.5

5.5

Olet - Instrument
ITFL 3

Flanged 8.0
1 0 2

5.0

Tee - Butt Weld TEBW VARIABLE


ANGLE 2,3
3

() () 1 0 2

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-41


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.16 TEE or OLET Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
VARIABLE
ANGLE

Tee - Compression TECP 3


2,3
() () 1 0 2

VARIABLE
ANGLE

Tee - Flanged TEFL 3 2,3


1 0 2

VARIABLE
ANGLE

Tee - Screwed TESC 3 2,3

() () 1 0 2

VARIABLE
ANGLE

Tee - Set-on TESO 3 1,2

() () 1 0 2

VARIABLE
ANGLE

Tee - Set-on TERF 1,2


REINFORCED
3
Reinforced
() () 1 0 2

VARIABLE
ANGLE

Tee - Pulled TPUL 3 1,2

() () 1 0 2

VARIABLE
ANGLE

Tee - Socket Weld TESW 3 2,3

() () 1 0 2

Tee - Swept Branch TSBW 3 2


Butt Weld () () 1 0 2

3-42 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.16 TEE or OLET Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

Tee - Swept Branch


TSFL 2
3

Flanged 1 0 2

Tee - Swept Branch TSCP 2


Compression 3

() () 1 0 2

Tee - Swept Branch TSSW 2


Socket Weld 3

() () 1 0 2

VARIABLE
ANGLE 4,5,6
3
Tee - Generic Y-type Y@** 0
1 2
with variable angle
out- and off- legs
VARIABLE
ANGLE

Notes:
1. The position of P3 along the perpendicular axis is important for deriving the cut pipe
length. The perpendicular displacement of P3 is determined by the point at which
the offline leg intersects the main line. For TESO and TERF, the distance P0 to P3
must not exceed half the main bore; P0, P1, P2 and P3 will be coincident when the
offline leg has the same bore as the main line. For TPUL, the distance P0 to P3 must
exceed half the main bore. If the position of P3 does not follow these rules, any weld
shown at the intersection may appear in the wrong place.
2. The dimensions of piping components depend upon plotted leg length. The default
plotted leg length is 9mm, but you can set this to a different value using the
LEGLENGTH command. The minimum value you can set is 6mm.
3. The TEBW, TECP, TEFL, TESC and TESW SKEYs can be used for laterals.
4. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-43


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.16 TEE or OLET Symbol Keys (continued)

5. The @ character in the symbol key is replaced automatically by an integer in the


range 1 to 3, depending on the relative bore size of the connections, with 1 assigned
to the largest bore. It is important to note the bore size if redefining the SKEYS for
Y1**, Y2** or Y3**.
6. Flanged connections on generic Y-type fittings are represented on the isometric on
the tube only. This is due to the fact that the y-type fitting is user-definable and
flanged representation on the component cannot be enforced.

3-44 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.16 TRAP Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
8.0
Trap - In Line
TI** 2
(Straight Through) 4.5 10 2

9.25

0
4.0 8.0 1
Trap - Angle TA** 2 1,2

4.5

Trap - Offset TO** 8.0


1,3
0
1
6.0 8.0
2
3

5.0

Trap - Return TR** 2


3 1,4
21.5 26.0
0
1

Notes:
1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-45


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.17 TRAP Symbol Keys (continued)

2. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following
diagram:

P0
P2

P1
3. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following
diagram:

P0

P2
P1
P1 P0

P3 P3 P2

Plan

P1 P0
P0 P1

P2 P3 P2
P3

End Side

P3 must not have a valid bore. It is used only to obtain correct orientation of the
element.
P3 can be orientated in PARAGON.
Note that the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0, P1, P2 and P3 may be
coplanar.

3-46 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.17 TRAP Symbol Keys (continued)

4. To use this symbol, the p-points must be arranged as shown in the following
diagram:

P2
P3

P0 P1

Note that the horizontal offset may be zero; i.e. P0 and P1 (and similarly P2 and P3)
may be coincident.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-47


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.17 UNIO Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
5.5

Union - Screwed UNSC 10 2


2.5

Union - Socket Weld UNSW 5.5

2.5 10 2

3-48 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.18 UNIVERSAL Symbol Key

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
1,2
Universal key for UNIV
generic type PCOM 10 mm

Notes:
1. Radius of circle is controlled by percentage scale factor attribute, SkeyScale, on
SDTE element (100% = 10 mm). Symbol also has a line from circumference to each
connection point.
2. UNIV Skey implies no end connection information. To flag end connections, the
PSkey on each p-point must be set to one of the following end condition identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain (default if unset)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-49


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.19 VALV Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
9.25

4.0 03
Valve - Angle AV** 1 1,2
8.0 2

4.75

9.25

Valve - Angle Pressure 03


AX** 4.0 1 1,2
Reducing 8.0 2

4.75

9.25

Valve - Angle 03
AR** 4.0 1 1,2
Relief/Vent 8.0 2

4.75

9.25

Valve - Ball VB** 4.0 1,2


1 0 3 2

3.0

Valve - Basic VV** 4.0 1,2


1 0 3 2

9.25

Valve - Butterfly VY** 4.0 1,2


1 0 3 2

9.25

3-50 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.20 VALV Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

4.0
Valve - Check VC** 1
0
2
1,2
9.25

Valve - Check CK** 1


0 1,2
4.0 2

9.0

Valve - Cock VK** 1,2


1 0 3 2
4.0

9.25

Valve - Diaphragm VD** 1,2


1 0 3 2
4.0

9.25

Valve - Gate VT** 1,2


1 0 3 2
4.0

9.25

Valve - Globe VG** 1,2


1 0 3 2
4.0

9.25

Valve - Needle VN** 1,2


4.0 1 0 3 2

9.25

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-51


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.20 VALV Symbol Keys (continued)

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description
Valve - Plug VP** 1,2
1 0 3 2
4.0

9.25

Valve - Pressure VX** 1,2


Reducing 4.0 2.5 1 0 3 2

9.25

Valve - Relief/Vent VR** 1,2


1 0 3 2
4.0

9.25

Valve - Slide VS** 1,2


1 0 3 2
4.0

9.25

Notes:
1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
2. If an orientation p-point is present in the point set, then ISODRAFT will output the
orientation of this p-point unless it is oriented in a primary direction (X, Y, Z etc.)

3-52 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.20 VENT Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

2.5
Rupture Disk RD 10 2

7.75

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-53


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.21 VFWA Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

9.25
3
Valve - 4 Way V4** 4.0
0 5
1,2
8.0 1 2
4

4.5

Notes:
1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
2. If an orientation p-point (P5) is present in the point set, the orientation of that p-
point will be shown on the isometric.

3-54 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.22 VTWA Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

9.25

Valve - 3 Way V3** 4.0


1
04
2
1,2
8.0 3

4.5

Notes:
1. Replace the ** characters in the symbol key with one of the following end condition
identifiers:
BW for butt weld
CP for compression
SW for socket weld
FL for flanged
SC for screwed
PL for plain
2. If an orientation p-point (P5) is present in the point set, the orientation of that p-
point will be shown on the isometric.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-55


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.23 WELD Symbol Keys

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol P-points Notes


Description

Weld - Site WS 4.0


1 0 2

4.0

FFW

Weld - Field Fitted WF 4.0


1 0 2

4.0

Weld - Shop WW
1 0 2

3-56 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.24 Floor Penetration ATTA Symbol

Component SKEY Plotted Symbol Notes


Description

Pipe passing through


FLOR 1,2,3
floor

Notes:
1. Same rules apply as those used for positioning the FLOW ARROW symbol (see
VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide Section 4.2).
2. Must only be positioned in vertical sections of pipeline.
3. ISODRAFT will automatically orientate the fitting shape to suit the up/down
direction of the pipeline.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-57


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

3.25 Symbol Key Reference Index

This section lists all available symbol keys (SKEYs) in alphabetic order. Cross-
references are given to the generic component types (GTYPEs) under which you will find
them described in the preceding sections of this appendix (if appropriate).
Each SKEY has an indication of whether or not it may be redefined, as explained in the
VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide Section 10.1. For components which include
spindles, the standard spindle type associated with the predefined SKEY is indicated,
see the VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide Section 10.3 for illustrations of these
spindle types.

USER SPINDLE
SKEY GTYPE COMPONENT
DEFINABLE? TYPE

AR** VALV Angled Pressure Reducing Valve Yes 09SP

AV** VALV Angled Valve Yes 01SP


AX** VALV Angled Relief Valve or Vent Yes 02SP
BA** PCOM Angle Block No
BEFL BEND Flanged Bend No
BO** PCOM Offset Block Yes
BR** PCOM Return Block No
BTFL BEND Flanged Bend with Tee No
BU+D BEND Pulled Return Bend No
BUFL BEND Flanged Return Bend No
C3** INST 3-Way Control Valve No 13SP
C4** INST 4-Way Control Valve No 13SP
CA** INST Angled Control Valve Yes 13SP
CEBW COUP Butt Weld Elbolet Yes
CESC COUP Screwed Fitting Elbolet Yes
CESW COUP Socket Weld Elbolet Yes
CH** PCOM Hose Coupling Yes
CK** VALV Check Valve Yes
COCP COUP Compression Fitting Coupling Yes
COSC COUP Screwed Fitting Coupling Yes
COSW COUP Socket Weld Coupling Yes

3-58 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

USER SPINDLE
SKEY GTYPE COMPONENT
DEFINABLE? TYPE
CPBW REDU Butt Weld Concentric Reducer Yes
CPFL REDU Flanged Concentric Reducer Yes
CRBW CROS Butt Weld Cross No
CRCP CROS Compression Fitting Cross No
CRFL CROS Flanged Cross No
CRRF CROS Set On Reinforced Cross No
CRSC CROS Screwed Fitting Cross No
CRSO CROS Set On Cross No
CRSW CROS Socket Weld Cross No
CSBW REDU Butt Weld Concentric Reducer Yes
CSFL REDU Flanged Concentric Reducer Yes
Butt Weld Concentric Reducer
CTBW REDU Yes
with Tee
Flanged Concentric Reducer
CTFL REDU Yes
with Tee
Screwed Fitting Concentric with
CTSC REDU Yes
Tee
Socket Weld Concentric Reducer
CTSW REDU Yes
with Tee
CV** INST Control Valve Yes 13SP
Butt Weld Concentric Reducer
CXBW REDU Yes
with Tee
Flanged Concentric Reducer
CXFL REDU Yes
with Tee
Butt Weld Concentric Reducer
CZBW REDU Yes
with Tee
Flanged Concentric Reducer
CZFL REDU Yes
with Tee
DR INST Rupture Disc Yes
EBSC ELBO Screwed Fitting (Male) Elbow No
ELBW ELBO Butt Weld Elbow No
ELCP ELBO Compression Fitting Elbow No
ELSC ELBO Screwed Fitting Elbow No

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-59


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

USER SPINDLE
SKEY GTYPE COMPONENT
DEFINABLE? TYPE
ELSW ELBO Socket Weld Elbow No
EPBW REDU Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer Yes
EPFL REDU Flanged Eccentric Reducer Yes
ER** ELBO Reducing Elbow No
ESBW REDU Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer Yes
ESFL REDU Flanged Eccentric Reducer Yes
ETBW ELBO Butt Weld Elbow with Tee No
Compression Fitting Elbow with
ETCP ELBO No
Tee
ETSC ELBO Screwed Fitting Elbow with Tee No
ETSW ELBO Socket Weld Elbow with Tee No
EUBW ELBO Butt Weld Return Elbow No
EX** PCOM Expansion Bellows Yes
Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer
EXBW REDU Yes
with Tee
Flanged Eccentric Reducer with
EXFL REDU Yes
Tee
Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer
EZBW REDU Yes
with Tee
Flanged Eccentric Reducer with
EZFL REDU Yes
Tee
FA** FILT Angled Filter No
Straight-Through (In-Line)
FI** FILT Yes
Filter
FLBL FLAN Blind or Blanking Flange Yes
FLBL FBLI Blind or Blanking Flange Yes
FLFL FLAN Flared Flange Yes
FLLB FLAN Loose Backing Flange Yes
FLOW Flow Arrow Yes
FLRC FLAN Reducing Flange Yes
FLRC FBLI Reducing Flange Yes
FLRE FLAN Eccentric Reducing Flange Yes

3-60 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

USER SPINDLE
SKEY GTYPE COMPONENT
DEFINABLE? TYPE
FLRE FBLI Eccentric Reducing Flange Yes
FLRG LJSE Lap Joint Ring No
FLOR ATTA Floor Penetration Type ATTA Yes
FLSC FLAN Screwed Fitting Flange Yes
FLSE LJSE Lap Joint Stub End No
FLSJ FLAN Slip-on J-Type Welded Flange Yes
FLSW FLAN Socket Weld Flange Yes
FLSO FLAN Slip-on Flange Yes
FLWN FLAN Weld Neck Flange Yes
FO** FILT Offset Filter Yes
FOSO FLAN Slip-on Flange with Orifice Yes
FOWN FLAN Weld Neck Flange with Orifice Yes
Fixed Length Pipe with Flanged
FPFL FTUB No
Ends
Fixed Length Pipe with Plain
FPPL FTUB Yes
Ends
FR** FILT Return Filter No
FT** PCOM Flame Trap Yes
FX** PCOM Flexible Hose Yes
H3** INST 3-Way Control Valve No 12SP
H4** INST 4-Way Control Valve No 12SP
HA** INST Angled Control Valve Yes 12SP
HC** OLET Screwed Half Coupling Yes
HC** OLET Socket Weld Half Coupling Yes
HV** INST Control Valve Yes 12SP
IA** INST Angled Instrument Yes
IDFL INST Flanged Instrument with Dial No
IDPL INST Instrument with Dial No
II** INST Instrument Yes
IO** INST Offset Instrument Yes
IR** INST Return Instrument No

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-61


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

USER SPINDLE
SKEY GTYPE COMPONENT
DEFINABLE? TYPE
ITFL OLET Flanged Instrument Tee No
KABW CAP Butt Weld Cap Yes
KACP CAP Compression Fitting Cap Yes
KASC CAP Screwed Fitting Cap Yes
KASW CAP Socket Weld Cap Yes
L@BW BEND Butt Weld Lobster Back Bend No
L@FL BEND Flanged Lobster Back Bend No
LA** OLET Butt Weld Latrolet Yes
LA** OLET Screwed Fitting Latrolet Yes
LA** OLET Socket Weld Latrolet Yes
M3** INST 3-Way Motorised Valve No 11SP
M4** INST 4-Way Motorised Valve No
MA** INST Angled Control Valve Yes 11SP
MIBW BEND Butt Weld Mitred Bend No
MIFL BEND Flanged Mitred Bend No
MTBW BEND Butt Weld Mitred Bend with Tee No
MTFL BEND Flanged Mitred Bend with Tee No
MV** INST Motorised Valve Yes 11SP
NBSC COUP Screwed Nipple Yes
NC** PCOM Non-Category Item Yes
NC** SHU Non-Category Item Yes
NI** OLET Plain End Nipolet Yes
NI** OLET Screwed Fitting Nipolet Yes
NRSC COUP Screwed Fitting Nipple Yes
OP INST Orifice Plate Yes
Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer
OTBW REDU Yes
with Tee
Flanged Eccentric Reducer with
OTFL REDU Yes
Tee
Screwed Fitting Eccentric
OTSC REDU Yes
Reducer with Tee

3-62 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

USER SPINDLE
SKEY GTYPE COMPONENT
DEFINABLE? TYPE
PB+D BEND Pulled Bend No
PF CLOS Fixed Length Pipe Block Yes
PL PCOM Plug Yes
PV CLOS Variable Length Pipe Block Yes
PR INST Restrictor Plate Yes
RA** INST Angled Relief Valve Yes 02SP
Screwed Fitting Concentric
RBSC REDU Yes
Reducing Bush
Socket Weld Concentric
RBSW REDU Yes
Reducing Bush
RCBW REDU Butt Weld Concentric Reducer Yes
Compression Fitting Concentric
RCCP REDU Yes
Reducer
RCFL REDU Flanged Concentric Reducer Yes
Screwed Fitting Concentric
RCSC REDU Yes
Reducer
RCSW REDU Socket Weld Concentric Reducer Yes
RD VENT Rupture Disc Yes
REBW REDU Butt Weld Eccentric Reducer Yes
REFL REDU Flanged Eccentric Reducer Yes
Screwed Fitting Eccentric
RESC REDU Yes
Reducer
RF REDU Special Reducing Flange Yes
Nipple Fitting Concentric
RNSC REDU Yes
Reducer
RP PCOM Restrictor Plate Yes
RV** INST Relief Valve Yes
3-Way Control Valve with
S3** INST No 10SP
Square Indicator
4-Way Control Valve with
S4** INST No 10SP
Square Indicator
Angled Control Valve with
SA** INST Yes 10SP
Square Indicator

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-63


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

USER SPINDLE
SKEY GTYPE COMPONENT
DEFINABLE? TYPE
SB PCOM Spectacle Blind Yes
SG** PCOM Sight Glass Yes
SK** OLET Socket Weld Sockolet Yes
SP PCOM Slip Plate Yes
SR PCOM Slip Ring Yes
Control Valve with Square
SV** INST Yes 10SP
Indicator
SW** OLET Butt Weld Sweepolet Yes
Butt Weld Lobster Back Bend
T@BW BEND No
with Tee
Flanged Lobster Back Bend with
T@FL BEND No
Tee
TA** TRAP Angled Trap No
TB+D BEND Pulled Bend with Tee No
TEBW TEE Butt Weld Tee No
TECP TEE Compression Fitting Tee No
TEFL TEE Flanged Tee No
TESC TEE Screwed Fitting Tee No
TESO TEE Set On Tee No
TERF TEE Reinforced Tee No
TESW TEE Socket Weld Tee No
TH** OLET Screwed Fitting Thredolet Yes
TI** TRAP In-line Trap Yes
TO** TRAP Offset Trap Yes
TR** TRAP Return Trap No
TPUL TEE Pulled Tee No
TSBW TEE Butt Weld Swept Tee No
TSCP TEE Compression Fitting Swept Tee No
TSFL TEE Flanged Swept Tee No
TSSW TEE Socket Weld Swept Tee No
TU** PCOM Tundish or Funnel Yes

3-64 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

USER SPINDLE
SKEY GTYPE COMPONENT
DEFINABLE? TYPE
UNSC UNIO Screwed Fitting Union Yes
UNSW UNIO Socket Weld Union Yes
See VANTAGE
Universal Skey for special PDMS
UNIV PCOM
fittings ISODRAFT
User Guide
V3** VTWA 3-Way Valve No 01SP
V4** VFWA 4-Way Valve No 01SP
VB** VALV Ball Valve Yes 03SP
VC** VALV Check Valve Yes
VD** VALV Diaphragm Valve Yes 01SP
VG** VALV Globe Valve Yes 01SP
VK** VALV Cock Valve Yes 03SP
VN** VALV Needle Valve Yes 06SP
VP** VALV Plug Valve Yes 07SP
VR** VALV Relief Valve Yes 02SP
VS** VALV Slide Valve Yes 08SP
VT** VALV Gate Valve Yes 05SP
VV** VALV Basic Valve Yes 01SP
VX** VALV Pressure Reducing Valve Yes 09SP
VY** VALV Butterfly Valve Yes 03SP
WF WELD Field Fitted Weld No
WS WELD Site Weld No
WTBW OLET Butt Weld Weldolet Yes
WW WELD Shop Weld No
XA** INST Angled Pressure Reducing Valve Yes 09SP
XV** INST Pressure Reducing Valve Yes 09SP
Generic Y-type Cross with user-
X@** CROS Yes
definable out- and off- legs
Generic Y-type Tee with user-
Y@** TEE Yes
definable out- and off- legs

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 3-65


Version 11.6
Symbol Keys

USER SPINDLE
SKEY GTYPE COMPONENT
DEFINABLE? TYPE
Hanger (As a basis for user-
01HG defined hangers; see ISODRAFT Yes
User Guide Section 10.4)
Note: ** denotes any of the following connection types:
BW Butt Weld
CP Compression Fitting
FL Flanged
SC Screwed Fitting
SW Socket Weld
PL Plain
@ in Bends, denotes the number of bend segments (range 19)
in X-type and Y-type Crosses/Tees, replaced by an integer in the range 1 to 4, 1
indicating the largest bore, 4 indicating the smallest bore.
+ denotes the ratio of the bend radius to the pipe bore (range 19)

3-66 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
4 Alternative Texts

4.1 Introduction

You can change or remove all the text on isometric drawings using the ATEXT command.
This appendix lists the default settings of the text phrases, with their reference
numbers.
The alternative texts (Atexts) have been broken down under the following headings:
The isometric drawing area (Section 4.2)
The title block area (Section 4.3)
The plotted material list (Section 4.4)
The line summary area (Section 4.5)
The printed material list (Section 4.6
The weld box summary (Section 4.7)
The bend table (Section 4.8)
If an Atext is made blank, any additional information that may have been drawn in or
appended to the corresponding area will be suppressed.

4.2 The Isometric Drawing Area

201 E
Denotes east in coordinates
202 N
Denotes north in coordinates
203 W
Denotes west in coordinates
204 S
Denotes south in coordinates
205 EL +
Denotes a positive elevation in coordinates (up)
206 EL -
Denotes a negative elevation in coordinates (down)

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 4-1


Version 11.6
Alternative Texts

207 NS
Denotes a pipes nominal size (bore)
208 CONN. TO
Denotes CONNected TO, where a pipe end is connected to a nozzle
209 CONT. ON
Denotes CONTinued ON, where a pipe is continued on another
drawing sheet. See also Atext 276.
210 F
Denotes a flange (used as the material list pointer for flanges)
211 G
Denotes a gasket (used as the material list pointer for gaskets)
212 B
Denotes a bolt (used as the material list pointer for bolts)
213 SPINDLE
Used to show the spindle direction of a valve when it is not a primary
direction
214 MM
Denotes millimetres (used at angle valves etc.)
215 REDUCING FLANGE
Message pointing to any reducing flange
216 OFFSET
Message used where an offset occurs. For example, at eccentric
reducers, offset reducing flanges, offset blocks etc.
279 L
Denotes a lap joint stub end (used as the material list pointer for
LJSEs)
217 MITRE
Denotes mitre-type bend (see also Atext 231)
218 LOBSTER
Denotes lobster-type bend (see also Atext 231)
219 REINFORCED
Message pointing to any reinforced tee (symbol key TERF)
220 LEFT LOOSE
Message pointing to any flange where attribute LOOSE is set to
TRUE
221 FFW
Message pointing to any field-fitted weld (symbol key WF)

4-2 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Alternative Texts

222 FALL
Denotes a falling pipeline.
223
If left blank, this Atext automatically produces the symbol for falling
lines specified in degrees
224 :
Used for falling lines specified as a ratio (e.g. 1:10)
225
If left blank, this Atext automatically produces the % symbol for
falling lines specified as a percentage
226 GRAD
Used for falling lines specified in grads
227 PER M
Used for falling lines specified in metric units, to indicate millimetres
per metre
228 PER FT
Used for falling lines specified in imperial units, to indicate inches per
foot
229 SCREWED END
Message pointing to any open ended pipe whose HCON or TCON is
set to SCRD
230 VENT
Message pointing to any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is set to
VENT
231 BEND
Associated with Atexts 217 and 218.
236 S
Denotes that a support exists at a component.
237
Indicates inches
238
Indicates feet
239 DRAIN
Message pointing to any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is set to
DRAN
240
This Atext is blank by default. It can be used to produce a message at
any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is set to OPEN.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 4-3


Version 11.6
Alternative Texts

241
This Atext is blank by default. It can be used to produce a message at
any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is set to CLOS.
242
This Atext is blank by default. It can be used to produce a message at
any pipe end whose HCON or TCON is not one of the recognised ends;
i.e. not SCRD, VENT, DRAN, OPEN or CLOS.
243
This Atext is blank by default. If it is set to any word (e.g. FLAT),
eccentric reducers will have the orientation of their flat side indicated
by that word.
Note that this Atext is used with Atexts 244, 245, 246, 247, 248 and
249.
See also the note following Atext 283.
Note: Atext 243 produces the flat side message for reducers in orthogonal
piping and Atext 283 is used for reducers in non-orthogonal piping.
ISODRAFT indicates the flat side of an eccentric reducer by default
only when the reducer is skewed. By using Atexts 243 and 283, you
may have the flat side indicated, or not, for skewed-only or all reducers.
244 UP
For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283
245 DOWN
For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283
246 NORTH
For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283
247 SOUTH
For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283
248 EAST
For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283
249 WEST
For use in conjunction with Atexts 243 and 283
275 SWEPT TEE
Message pointing to any tee whose symbol key is TSBW
276 CONT. FROM
Denotes CONTinued FROM, where a pipe is continued from another
drawing sheet.
See also Atext 255 in Section D.3.
277 ORIFICE FLANGE
Message pointing to orifice flanges

4-4 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Alternative Texts

278 DIAL FACE


Message pointing to instrument dials (symbol keys IDPL and IDFL)
280 TAPPING
Message pointing to orifice plates
281 TAIL
Message pointing to spectacle blinds and slip plates
282 WINDOW
Message pointing to sight glasses
283 FLAT
Used to indicate the orientation of the flat side of an eccentric reducer
when the reducer is skewed.
Note that this Atext is used with Atexts 244, 245, 246, 247, 248 and
249.
See also the following note.
284 TEE BEND
Message pointing to bends that have an offline leg
286
This Atext is blank by default. If it is set, a message will be output at
screwed erection fittings.
287 ORIENTATION DIRECTION
Shows the orientation of a skewed olet which has nothing, or only a
plug, attached.
288 PIPE
Used on system isometrics to show the position(s) of any change of
Pipe reference.
289 MATL
Message pointing to any place in the pipe where the specification
changes if Dimensiontype is in force (see the SPECBREAK command).
The names of the old and new specifications are automatically
included. (See also Atext 232.)

290 INSUL Message pointing to any place in the pipe where the
insulation/tracing/paint specification changes. The
291 TRACE names of the old and new specifications are
292 PAINT automatically included.

298 TEE ELBOW


Message pointing to elbows that have an offline leg

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 4-5


Version 11.6
Alternative Texts

337 D BEND RADIUS


Shows radius of pulled bend in multiples of the pipe diameter
338 BEND RADIUS
Shows radius of pulled bend in current distance units (mm or inch)
349 PP
Used as a heading for personnel protection insulation.
350 REDUCING ELBOW
Message pointing to reducing elbows. Note that this text is also used
on the Material List.
454 CONNECTION ORIENTATION
Shows the orientation of a skewed fabricated tee which has nothing
connected.
477 PER 10 FT
Message showing imperial fall accuracy.
478 PER 100 FT
Message showing imperial fall accuracy.
451 TAPPING COORDINATES
Shows coordinates of tapping points for offline legs on user-defined
multiway PCOMs

460 BEAM $?
461 COLUMN $?
462 ? $BUILDING CL
463 CL EQUIPMENT $?
464 CL PIPELINE $?
465 ? $FLOOR LEVEL
466 ? $WALL
467 GRID LINE $?
468 ?
Text for reference dimensions. On the plot, $ is replaced by a new
line, and ? is replaced by the name of the element or one of its
parents.

4.3 The Title Block Area


250 DATE
The actual date is appended automatically in the required format (see
Section 6.42).
This Atext also uses Atexts 258 to 269, inclusive, if the date format is
set to UK.

4-6 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Alternative Texts

251 PROJECT NO
Used if the project number is to be plotted (see Section 6.41)
252 BATCH REF
The PDMS zone name is appended automatically
253 PIPING SPEC
The value of the attribute SPEC from the element PIPE is appended
automatically
254 ISS
The value of the attribute REV (i.e. the revision level) from the
element PIPE is appended automatically
255 DRG
Used only when a pipe is split over multiple drawing sheets. This
Atext is used in conjunction with Atext 256 (in the format DRG 1 OF
2) or with Atext 276 (in the format CONT. FROM
DRG 1).
256 OF
Used in conjunction with Atext 255
257 SPL
Denotes a SPOOL drawing. Sequential numbering, starting at 1 for
each pipe, is appended automatically.
258 JAN
259 FEB
260 MAR
261 APR All used in conjunction
262 MAY
263 JUN with Atext 250
264 JUL
265 AUG (for UK date formats)
266 SEP
267 OCT
268 NOV
269 DEC

270 THERMAL INSULATION SPEC


The value of the attribute ISPE of the element PIPE is appended
automatically
271 TRACING SPEC
The value of the attribute TSPE of the element PIPE is appended
automatically

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 4-7


Version 11.6
Alternative Texts

272 PAINTING SPEC


The value of the attribute PTSP of the element PIPE is appended
automatically

4.4 The Plotted Material List


300 FABRICATION MATERIALS
The heading for components whose SHOP attribute is set to TRUE
and for pipe selected from a specification with a ?SHOP set to TRUE
310 ERECTION MATERIALS
The heading for components whose SHOP attribute is set to FALSE
and for pipe selected from a specification with no ?SHOP or with a
?SHOP set to FALSE
301 PT
The part number pointer, used in conjunction with Atext 302
302 NO
Used in conjunction with Atext 301
303 COMPONENT DESCRIPTION
The sub-heading for the item description column
304 N.S.
Denotes nominal size (bore) of a pipe or component
305 ITEM CODE
The sub-heading for the item code column
306 QTY
Denotes quantity
307 PIPE
The sub-heading under which pipe is listed
308 FITTINGS
The sub-heading under which pipe fittings (elbows, tees etc.) are
listed
309 FLANGES
The sub-heading under which flanges are listed
311 GASKETS
The sub-heading under which gaskets are listed
312 BOLTS
The sub-heading under which bolts are listed

4-8 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Alternative Texts

313 VALVES / IN-LINE ITEMS


The sub-heading under which valves and in-line items are listed
314 INSTRUMENTS
The sub-heading under which instruments are listed
315 SUPPORTS
The sub-heading under which supports are listed
339 MISCELLANEOUS COMPONENTS
The sub-heading under which additional items are listed
316 PIPE SPOOLS
The sub-heading under which spool numbers are listed
319 CUT PIPE LENGTHS
The heading under which cut pipe lengths are listed
320 PIECE
The sub-heading to Atext 319 which identifies individual cut pipe
lengths. Used in conjunction with Atext 321.
321 NO
Used in conjunction with Atext 320
322 CUT
The sub-heading to Atext 319 which indicates the actual lengths of
the cut pipes listed. Used in conjunction with Atext 323
323 LENGTH
Used in conjunction with Atext 322
324 REMARKS
The sub-heading to Atext 319 under which Atexts 326, 327, or 328 will
be listed if applicable
326 PLD BEND
Listed under Atext 324 if a cut pipe length contains a pulled bend
327 LOOSE FLG
Listed under Atext 324 if a cut pipe length contains a loose flange
328 FF WELD
Listed under Atext 324 if a cut pipe length contains a fitted field weld
334 S
Used with fixed length piping. This Atext is appended to the item code
when one end of a fixed length spool has a special flange
335 WITH SPECIAL RATING FLANGE(S) (SEE ISO)
Used with fixed length piping. This Atext is appended to the
description. Used in conjunction with Atext 334.

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 4-9


Version 11.6
Alternative Texts

341 EQUIPMENT TRIM MATERIALS


Used as a heading for material lists in equipment trim isometrics (see
Section 6.16.2)
342 NOZZLE REF -
Used as a subheading for each group of components related to a
particular Nozzle in an equipment trim MTO list
343 CONTINUED
Indicates that the listing for a Nozzle in an equipment trim isometric
is continued from a previous drawing sheet
345 AND
Used to separate parts of an equipment trim MTO list between
connected Nozzles
346 GEARBOX ORIENTATION
Used for all valves created with a P11 to show the orientation of P11
347
This Atext is blank by default. It is used to set text at the bottom of
the material list on the master drawing to show that the information
is continued on another sheet. If it is defined, it will override the
standard Atexts 209, 255 and 256.
348
This Atext is blank by default. It is used to set text at the top of the
material list on an overflow drawing to show that the information is
continued on another sheet. If it is defined, it will override the
standard Atexts 276, 255 and 256.
350 REDUCING ELBOW
The subheading under which reducing elbows are listed. Note that
this text is also used in the drawing area.
377 PLD TEE
The entry in the REMARKS column of the cutting or material list for
tube pieces including pulled tee.
378 SETON TEE
The entry in the REMARKS column of the cutting or material list for
tube pieces including set-on tee.
480 SPOOL
This Atext is used in headings to show the spool number.
481 NO SPOOL
This Atext is used in headings for components which are not included
in any spool.

4-10 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Alternative Texts

4.5 The Line Summary Area

The symbol identification texts that are used in the line summary area, along the
bottom of the isometric drawing, can be changed or made blank.
If one of these Atexts is changed, the corresponding symbol will still be drawn. If the
Atext is made blank, the corresponding symbol will not be drawn in the line summary
area.
400 TRACED PIPE
401 LAGGED PIPE These texts are all used as explanatory
402 PIPE SUPPORT
403 COMPN JOINT captions for the examples of drawing
404 SCREWED JOINT
405 SOCKET WELD symbols used on the isometrics
406 FIELD WELD
407 SHOP WELD
411 SITE CONNECTION

The following Atexts also appear in the line summary area:


317 PIPE NS
Used in conjunction with Atext 318. The total centre line length for
each bore is calculated automatically and listed against this caption.
318 CL LENGTH
Used, in conjunction with Atext 317, to summarise centre line lengths
410 [1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO
1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO
A standard explanatory note

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 4-11


Version 11.6
Alternative Texts

408
Normally left blank. Can be used to add explanatory text in the line
summary area. For example:
ATEXT 408 PULLED BEND RADIUS IS
3 x NOMINAL PIPE BORE

409
Normally left blank. Can be used to add explanatory text in the line
summary area. For example:
ATEXT 409 ALL FLANGES 150 LB RATING
UNLESS STATED OTHERWISE

4.6 The Printed Material List

The Atexts that are used in the printed material list only are:
329 M
Denotes metres
330 INS
Denotes inches
331 MM
Denotes millimetres
332 PAGE
A page number is appended automatically
333 PIPELINE REF
The pipe name is appended automatically
336 SYSTEM REF
Used to identify system isometrics. The system name is appended
automatically.

4.7 The Weld Box Summary

The Atexts used in the weld box summary are as follows:


412 WELD |SHOP |WELD |WELDER |VISUAL |NDT |HARD |S.R |FAB.QA
413 NO |/FLD |PROC | ID |ACCEPT |NO | NO | |ACCEPT
Note: The vertical lines (|) shown in these examples are an essential part of the Atext
and must be input at the keyboard with the required text. The positioning of these lines
determines the output format.

4-12 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Alternative Texts

4.8 The Bend Table

The Atexts below are all titles of columns in the bend table:
470 PT NO
Part Number.
471 NB
Nominal Bore.
472 A
Dimension A.
473 B
Dimension B.
474 C
Dimension C.
475 ANGLE
The bend angle.
476 RADIUS
The bend radius.

4.9 Dynamic Detail Areas


479 DETAIL
This Atext is used to label items shown in separate detail plots, and
also as headings for the detail plots themselves.

4.10 The Bolt Report

The Atexts below are used in the Bolt Report titles:


325 LENGTH

351 FAB

352 EREC

353 BOLT DESCRIPTION

455 POSITIONS WRT

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 4-13


Version 11.6
5 The Material Control File

5.1 Introduction

The Material Control File is an ASCII file which contains a record of all materials
incorporated into the isometric drawing, including piping components, tube, bolts, etc.
It can be used to pass details of material requirements to an external material control
program.
A Material Control File is produced for each ISODRAW DETAIL command. The file
generated during a multiple plot run contains material records for all pipelines detailed
by that command.

5.2 Creating a Material Control File

To create a basic material control file, use the command:


MATControl filename
where filename is the name of a file in the operating system directory. If a file of the
given name exists, new data will be added to the end of it. If filename does not exist, a
new file is created.
The format of the material control file is described in Section 5.3.
You can create a more detailed material control file by using the EXTENDED command
as follows:
MATControl filename EXTended
The extended material control file contains the information contained in the basic
material control file (see Section 5.3), plus the following:
Part numbers (in word 8 of component records)
Item descriptions (as record -21)
File header with: -5 record (originating program/version)
-3 record (title block information)
Note: Always delete files once the data has been transferred to the external material
control system, to avoid wasting disk space.

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 5-1


Version 11.6
The Material Control File

5.3 The File Format

The data in the file is coded so as to produce a tabulated record of the quantity of each
type of component for each pipeline drawing.
Each pipeline record sequence begins with a general header, which includes references
and specifications applicable to the pipeline as a whole, followed by a detailed
breakdown of the individual items.
The codes used to identify the records are defined in the following sections.
The definitions may be understood more easily by referring to the example in Section
5.4, bearing in mind that only relevant records occur in any given case.

5.3.1 Overall File Structure


The general file header record sequence may be summarised as follows:

Record Contents
No.
-5 Originating program(s)
-3 Title block information

The overall record sequence for each pipeline may be summarised as shown below.

5-2 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
The Material Control File

Record Contents
No.
-6
to Pipeline header information (see Section B.3)
-19
50 Spool count plus drawing number/number of drawings
60 Centreline length summary by nominal size (bore)
(including a dimensional units indicator).
For any sheet containing more than six bores, addititional type
60 records will be written. The multiple type 60 records will be
consecutive in the file.
100 Tube
-20 Item Code Records for individual
-21 Description parts list items
200 Fitting (Fabrication type)
-20 Item Code (see Section B.3)
-21 Description
300 Flange
-20 Item Code
400 Gasket
-20 Item Code
-21 Description
500 Bolt
-20 Item Code
-21 Description
600 Valve or other in-line component
-20 Item Code
700 Instrument
-20 Item Code (NOTE: only those
-21 Description categories which actually
Support occur in the pipeline
800 will be listed)
-20 Item Code
-21 Description
900 Miscellaneous
-20 Item Code
-21 Description
1000 Miscellaneous
-20 Item Code
-21 Description
-6 Next pipeline header information Repeats for any number
to etc. of pipelines or drawings
-19
50 Next pipeline information and fittings Repeats for any number
to etc. of pipelines or drawings
1000

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 5-3


Version 11.6
The Material Control File

5.3.2 Material Control File Record Identification Numbers


The file section relating to each pipeline or drawing begins with a general header
(records coded -6 to -19) and continues with a separate record for each specific category
of information. A detailed breakdown of the information format for each of these
categories is given in the next subsection. The meanings of the various record type
identification numbers are as follows:

Record Contents
No.
-1 Overflow text record (used with all types of text records)
-3 Titleblock information
Once per file
-5 Originating program
-6 Pipeline reference (name or refno)
-7 User-defined spool prefix identifier
-8 Revision identifier (i.e. issue number)
-9 Project identifier (i.e. project number)
-10 Batch reference (Zone or Area name)
-11 Piping specification reference
-12 Nominal pressure rating (class)
-13 Line type identifier
-14 Date of data transfer
-15 Insulation specification reference
-16 Tracing specification reference
-17 Painting specification reference
-19 Pipeline operating temperature
-20 Item Code
-21 Item Description
-25 System Isometric reference
-29 Equipment trim reference
50 Number of spools plus drawing identification
60 Centreline length summary
100 Tube
200 Fittings (fabrication type)
300 Flanges
400 Gaskets
500 Bolts
600 Valves and other in-line components
700 Instruments
800 Supports
900 Miscellaneous
1000 Miscellaneous

The record formats are as follows (FORTRAN format):

5-4 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
The Material Control File

Record no. >0: 14I5


Record no. <0: I5, 3X, A13

5.3.3 Individual Formats for Each Type of Information Record


The following tables show the information which is output for each type of record, listed
in the word order in which it is output. A word in this context means one specific item of
information.
The effect of these formats on the output will be most easily seen by studying the output
sample listing given in Section 5.4.
Note: Each type of record has provision for up to 14 words, each word having an integer
field of length five. Only the number of words actually used for a particular type of
record is listed in the corresponding table.
Record Number 50: Spool Count, Drawing Number and Number of Drawings

Word Field Information Comments


Position (inc. range of valid values
Number and purpose if applicable)

1 Record type number Set to 50


2 Number of spools Set to appropriate number of
on drawing spools on drawing
3 Drawing number Used when a pipeline splits onto
more than one drawing sheet
(e.g. `2' in 2 of 4)
4 Number of Used when a pipeline splits onto
drawings more than one drawing sheet
(e.g. `4' in 2 of 4)

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 5-5


Version 11.6
The Material Control File

Record Number 60: Centreline Length Summary

Word Field Information Comments


Position (inc. range of valid values
Number and purpose if applicable)

1 Record type number Set to 60


2 Dimensional units indicator 0 = Imperial bores
Metric lengths
Units col. = bores 1 = Imperial bores and lengths
Tens col. = bolts 2 = Metric bores and lengths
3 Nominal bore Bores in mm or 1/16th inches
4 Centreline length Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft
5 Nominal bore Bores in mm or 1/16th inches
6 Centreline length Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft
7 Nominal bore Bores in mm or 1/16th inches
8 Centreline length Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft
9 Nominal bore Bores in mm or 1/16th inches
10 Centreline length Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft
11 Nominal bore Bores in mm or 1/16th inches
12 Centreline length Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft
13 Nominal bore Bores in mm or 1/16th inches
14 Centreline length Lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft

Notes: Each type 60 record can accommodate up to six sizes of tube (i.e. up to
six different nominal bores). If a drawing sheet contains more than six
bore sizes, more than one type 60 record will be created. These will be
written consecutively to the file.

The dimensional units specified by word 2 in record 60 are applicable to


all subsequent records up to the next set of header information; i.e. up
to the -6 identifier for the next pipeline.

5-6 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
The Material Control File

Record Number 100: Tube

Word Field Information Comments


Position (inc. range of valid values
Number and purpose if applicable)

1 Record type number Set to 100


2 Primary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
3 Secondary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
4 Third bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
(if required)
5 Quantity/length Tube lengths in 1/10 m or 1/10 ft
6 Fab/Erec marker 1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
7 not used

8 Part number

Record Number 200: Fittings

Word Field Information Comments


Position (inc. range of valid values
Number and purpose if applicable)

1 Record type number Set to 200


2 Primary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
3 Secondary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
4 Third bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
(if required)
5 Quantity Set to number of fitting types
required
6 Fab/Erec marker 1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
7 not used

8 Part number

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 5-7


Version 11.6
The Material Control File

Record Number 300: Flanges

Word Field Information Comments


Position (inc. range of valid values
Number and purpose if applicable)

1 Record type number Set to 300


2 Primary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
3 Secondary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
4 Third bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
(if required)
5 Quantity Set to number of flanges
required
6 Fab/Erec marker 1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
7 not used

8 Part number

Record Number 400: Gaskets

Word Field Information Comments


Position (inc. range of valid values
Number and purpose if applicable)

1 Record type number Set to 400


2 Primary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
3 Secondary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
4 Third bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
(if required)
5 Quantity Set to number of gaskets
required
6 Fab/Erec marker 1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
7 not used

8 Part number

5-8 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
The Material Control File

Record Number 500: Bolts

Word Field Information Comments


Position (inc. range of valid values
Number and purpose if applicable)

1 Record type number Set to 500

2 Bolt diameter Diameters in mm or 1/16th inches


3 Not used
4 Not used
5 Quantity Set to number of bolts required
6 Fab/Erec marker 1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
7 Bolt length Bolt lengths in mm

8 Part number

Record Number 600: Valves and In-line Items

Word Field Information Comments


Position (inc. range of valid values
Number and purpose if applicable)

1 Record type number Set to 600


2 Primary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
3 Secondary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
4 Third bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
(if required)
5 Quantity Set to number of items required
6 Fab/Erec marker 1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
7 Not used
8 Part number

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 5-9


Version 11.6
The Material Control File

Record Number 700: Instruments

Word Field Information Comments


Position (inc. range of valid values
Number and purpose if applicable)

1 Record type number Set to 700


2 Primary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
3 Secondary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
4 Third bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
(if required)
5 Quantity Set to number of instruments
required
6 Fab/Erec marker 1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
7 Not used

8 Part number

Record Number 800: Supports and Hangers

Word Field Information Comments


Position (inc. range of valid values
Number and purpose if applicable)

1 Record type number Set to 800


2 Primary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
3 Secondary bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
4 Third bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches
(if required)
5 Quantity Set to number of supports and/or
hangers required
6 Fab/Erec marker 1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
7 Not used
8 Part number

5-10 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
The Material Control File

Record Number 900: Miscellaneous Component Record with Unit Quantity

Word Field Information Comments


Position (inc. range of valid values
Number and purpose if applicable)

1 Record type number Set to 900


2 Component Bore or Bolt Bores in mm or 1/16 inches, or zero
Diameter
3 Not used

4 Not used

5 Quantity Set to number of components


required
6 Fab/Erec marker 1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
7 Bolt Length In mm or zero
8 Part number

Record Number 1000: Miscellaneous Component Record with Length Quantity

Word Field Information Comments


Position (inc. range of valid values
Number and purpose if applicable)

1 Record type number Set to 1000


2 Component Bore Bores in mm or 1/16 inches, or zero

3 Not used

4 Not used

5 Quantity In 1/10 m or 1/10 ft


(Length)
6 Fab/Erec marker 1 = Fabrication
2 = Erection
7 Not used
8 Part number

PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual 5-11


Version 11.6
The Material Control File

5.4 Example of a Material Control File Output


-6 WTZA601
-8 1
-10 RJK51->
-11 M150
-12 150
-13 WELD
-14 29/01/87
-15 LAG1
50 2 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
60 0 96 73 64 73 16 23 0 0 0 0 0 0
100 96 0 0 62 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-20 PML40
100 64 0 0 60 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-20 PML40
100 16 0 0 20 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-20 PML80
200 96 64 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-20 REBW
200 96 0 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-20 ELBW
200 64 64 0 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
...
300 16 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-20 FMM150SW
...
400 64 0 0 5 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-20 JC150R2
...
500 12 0 0 16 2 76 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-20 BM3/4X76
...
600 64 0 0 1 2 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
-20 VBFL
...

5-12 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
A Error Messages

This appendix lists ISODRAFT error messages that may be output to the screen and
message file.
Messages generated by ISODRAFT itself have message numbers beginning with 33.
Messages generated by the ISODRAW module within ISODRAFT have message
numbers beginning with 35. In most cases these will arise only when the program
limits have been reached, and you should contact the AVEVA Customer Services
Team.
Any other messages that may be output are not described here as they are not specific to
ISODRAFT.
Note: Many of the messages you will see when using ISODRAFT result from design or
cataloguing errors, not from errors in using ISODRAFT. For this reason a data
consistency check is strongly advised before ISODRAFT is used.
The error messages can include variables, presented in this appendix as follows:
integer an integer
realno a real (i.e. non-integer) number
name an item name (general context)
name/refno a name of an item (or refno if unnamed)
filename a PDMS filename
text an alphanumeric character string
(33:1) Paper size A4 to A0 only allowed
See the SIZE command.
(33:2) ISO 1,2,3,4 only allowed
See the ISO command.
(33:3) AREA must be between 1 & 10
See the WASTAGE AREA command.
(33:110) BAD RETURN FILE
The list of pipes successfully detailed by ISODRAW cannot be read.
(33:114) VALUE MUST BE BETWEEN 1 AND 25
The maximum number of lines permitted in the title block area is 25.
(33:116) VALUE MUST BE BETWEEN 201 AND 500
The Atext numbers of texts which can be changed by the ATEXT command
must be within the specified range. See Appendix D for more information on
Atexts.

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual A-1


Version 11.6
Error Messages

(33:121) PAPER LENGTH must be greater than ZERO


This is self-explanatory.
(33:123) SPEC REF name gives material code ( text )
longer than max of integer characters
The itemcode derived from the components name is longer than the width
allowed in the itemcode column in the material list (see the ITEMCODE
command).
(33:124) VALUE between 1 & 20 only
The identifying number allocated in a KEYS command must be within the
specified range.
(33:147) INST name/refno is not named
Itemcodes for instruments are currently defined as PDMS names (probably
by default) and an instrument has been found without a name.
(33:149) SYSTEM ERROR
Unable to scan pipe network
Check data consistency report and
flow directions at branch connections.
There is a design inconsistency which prevents ISODRAFT from detailing
the specified pipeline. Run a data consistency check to find probable sources
of error. In some cases this error may be produced by a configuration which is
legal but which cannot currently be scanned by ISODRAFT. This problem
can usually be resolved by splitting the pipe into more branches.
(33:150) BAD NAME/REF
A name or reference specified for detailing cannot be accessed.
(33:151) Too many items in DETAIL list
The Detail list cannot contain more than 100 items.
(33:152) Cant remove NAME/REF
A name or reference specified in a Remove list cannot be accessed. In
particular, note that World must not occur in a Remove list.
(33:153) Too many items in REMOVE list
The Remove list cannot contain more than 100 items.
(33:155) The DETAIL list is empty
Either there are no items in the Add list or the items specified in the Remove
list have completely cancelled out those specified in the Add list, leaving
nothing to be detailed.
(33:156) PLOT FILE NAME/PREFIX or TERM have not been specified
The output destination (terminal or named file) must be specified before
ISODRAFT can detail anything.

A-2 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Error Messages

(33:157) NO PIPES HAVE BEEN PROCESSED SUCCESSFULLY


ISODRAFT has failed to detail any pipes. The reasons may be suggested by
other error messages generated during the detailing processes.
(33:158) MORE THAN 100 BRANCHES IN PIPE name/refno
ISODRAFT cannot cope with more than 100 branches in one pipeline.
(33:159) NO BRANCHES IN PIPE name/refno
This is self-explanatory.
(33:160) name/refno will not be detailed
The specified Pipe or Branch cannot be detailed by ISODRAFT. The reason
may be found in another message or a data consistency report.
(33:162) HEAD & TAIL refs of BRANCH name/refno refer to the same component but
head & tail positions are not close enough to that component
There is an error in the identified branch, which has both ends connected to
the component. This should not normally occur.
(33:163) HEAD & TAIL refs of BRANCH name/refno refer to the same component and
head & tail positions are the same
There is an error in the identified branch, which has both ends connected to
the component. This should not normally occur.
(33:164) Component name/refno refers to a BRANCH ( name/refno )
which does not refer back to it

Tee points Branch head/tail


to branch points elsewhere

There is an inconsistency between the connection attribute of the component


and the branch to which it refers. For example
(33:165) The HEAD of name/refno is connected to name/refno but the positions are
not the same
(33:166) The TAIL of name/refno is connected to name/refno but the positions are not
the same
There is an inconsistency between the HPOS or TPOS attribute of the branch
and the p-point of the component to which it should be attached.
(33:167) ELEMENT name/refno is not a piping component
An element found while detailing a pipe is not of an appropriate type.

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual A-3


Version 11.6
Error Messages

(33:168) Cannot find FLANGE to match PPOINT integer of name/refno


The connection reference on the given p-point needs to be accessed to
determine the bolting requirements. This message means either that the
connection reference is unset or invalid, or that a component of type FLAN
cannot be found on that connection.
(33:169) Cannot find end of WAFER at name/refno
The other end of the wafer fitting at the specified location cannot be found.
Connection types commencing with W must be used in pairs.
(33:170) BOLTING BRANCH Table full
(33:171) BOLTING MULTIWAY COMPONENT Table full
These tables keep account of those items which have already been accessed
for bolting requirements. The limits are 100 items in the Branch Table and
200 items in the Multiway Component Table.
(33:172) No non-standard BOLT lengths for SBOLT name/refno
LENGTH is realno
(33:173) No long enough non-standard BOLT lengths for name/refno
See VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing
Requirements.
(33:174) No SPCOM for name/refno
The item specified has no component specification from which bolting
requirements (the BLTREF attribute) can be derived. See VANTAGE PDMS
ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing Requirements.
(33:175) No BOLTS for SPCOM name/refno
The SPCOM for the specified item does not have its BLTREF attribute set
and so its bolting requirements cannot be determined. See VANTAGE PDMS
ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing Requirements.
(33:176) Invalid SPCOM name/refno for component, or tube connected to, name/refno
A component, or the implied tube connected directly to it, does not have a
valid specification reference (SPRE or LSTU). Check the data consistency
report.
(33:177) Cannot get DETAIL info. on SPCOM name/refno
(33:178) Cannot get MATXT info. on SPCOM name/refno
These indicate possible cataloguing errors. The SPCOMs specified do not
have the appropriate attributes set for the data needed by ISODRAFT. See
VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 3, Cataloguing
Requirements.
(33:179) Reference datum name/refno is unnamed
No text will be shown for the reference dimension on the isometric.

A-4 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Error Messages

(33:180) PWAST attribute from SPCOM name/refno out of range 0.00 - 100.0
The wastage allowance attribute must be set to a percentage figure between
0 and 100%. See the WASTAGE AREA command.
(33:181) BOLT TABLE FULL
The number of different bolts which can be processed in a single pipe is
limited to 1000.
(33:182) name/refno connected to name/refno but not the other way round
(33:183) name/refno not close enough to name/refno
(33:184) ARRIVE or LEAVE PPOINT greater than 4
ISODRAFT can only deal with 4-way components whose arrive or leave
ppoints are not greater than 4.
(33:185) Multi-way component name/refno is not connected where expected
(33:187) Both legs of name/refno refer to the same BRANCH but positions are not
the same.
(33:188) Both legs of name/refno refer to the same BRANCH and positions are the
same.
(33:189) One leg of name/refno is connected to name/refno but the positions are not
the same.
Errors (33:182) to (33:189) all indicate possible errors in the Design DBs.
Check the data consistency report and correct errors using a design module.
(33:190) CANNOT OPEN OPTIONS WORK FILE : ERROR integer
(33:191) CANNOT OPEN MESSAGE FILE : ERROR integer
(33:192) OPTIONS STATE IS LOST
OPTIONS RESTORED TO DEFAULTS
These indicate system filing errors, possibly due to a disc overflow. In most
cases further explanatory messages will be output.
(33:193) MESSAGE FILE NOT SET
A file for output messages must be specified before ISODRAFT can begin any
detailing. See the MESSAGEFILENAME command.
(33:195) BRANCH name/refno is not in the network
A pipe must have all its branches connected to each other in order to be
detailed. The branch specified does not appear to be connected in this way.
(33:196) name/refno has already been detailed
The Pipe or Branch specified has its Detail Flag set to TRUE. It may be
detailed by using the MARK IGNORE ON option, or by resetting the DETA
attribute to FALSE in a design module.
(33:197) SYSTEM WARNING - MATERIAL NAME TABLE OVERFLOW - MAX integer
NAMES
This could occur on isometrics which incorporate a very large number of
different items. It could result in items with the same itemcodes, but with
different suffixes, being treated as different items.

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual A-5


Version 11.6
Error Messages

(33:198) ATTACHMENT POINT name/refno HAS NO STEXT


An ATTA being used as a comment (ATTY set to CCCC or CCNN) has no text
stored in its STEXT attribute.
(33:199) ERROR IN DETERMINING BOLTING FOR name/refno
See Section 2.2.2 for information on the cataloguing requirements for bolts.
(33:200) Unable to access PIPE SPEC name/refno
A pipe specification referenced by a pipe specified in a detailing command is
not accessible in the current MDB.
(33:203) BAD CONNECTION TO name/refno
This suggests a possible error in the HREF or TREF of a branch. Check the
data consistency report and rectify errors using a design module.
(33:252) Unable to locate text text within itemcode
The locating text specified in a BOLT LENGTH ITEM INSERT AT text
command (see the BOLTING command) cannot be found in the itemcode for a
bolt. ISODRAFT will use the default format for this bolt in the itemcode list
and outputs this message for information only.
(33:267) name/refno - Illegal or Inaccessible Reference Datum point
The reference dimension is pointing to an incorrect or non-existent element.
(33:268) Reference datum name/refno - Orientation has been modified to
prevent Doubleback Dimension error
The reference dimension requested for a Structure is parallel to the
centreline. A reasonable orientation has been chosen instead.
(33:269) Dimension omitted for Reference datum name/refno - Doubleback
Dimension
The reference dimension requested for a Piping component or Section is
parallel to the centreline.
(33:299) Illegal scale factor found for line flow arrow - default scale 8 used
The scale factor for in-line flow arrows must be in the range 5 to 15 inclusive.
(33:331) Illegal HREF connection on BRAN name/refno
(33:332) Illegal TREF connection on BRAN name/refno
The Head or Tail Reference of the Branch being detailed is invalid. It may
have been deleted, or it may be in a DB which is not current in the MDB.
(33:338) User defined symbol library has not been specified
You have tried to define a symbol without first specifying a symbol library
file in which to store the definition. See VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT User
Guide, Chapter 9, Symbol Keys.

A-6 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Error Messages

(33:340) Limit of integer user defined symbols exceeded


(33:341) Symbol key text rejected
You have tried to define more symbols than the current maximum limit of
300. The specified symbol will not be added to the symbol library. See
VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 9, Symbol Keys.
(33:343) Error in updating symbol library
An existing symbol file cannot be overwritten. Check that you have sufficient
access rights.
(33:345) Unable to create new symbol library text
A new symbol file cannot be created. Check that you have sufficient access
rights.
(33:346) Error reading symbol library text
An existing symbol file cannot be read. Check that you have sufficient access
rights.
(33:347) Unable to locate key text in symbol library
The specified SKEY cannot be found in the current symbol library.
(33:348) Row number integer is outside the range 1-999
(33:349) Table number integer is outside the range 1-999
You have exceeded the limits of table definition for user-positioned text. See
the ATEXT command.
(33:350) Limit of integer user positional text records exceeded
You have tried to position more than the current maximum limit of 100 text
fields. See the ATEXT command.
(33:351) Character size integer exceeds maximum limit of 99
You have specified a character height greater than the maximum limit of 99
mm. See the ATEXT command.
(33:361) Option number integer is outside the allowed range 1-140
Debug options must lie within the range 1-140.
(33:363) Balloon size integer is outside the allowed range 1-5
You have specified an instrument balloon size outside the permitted range of
1-5 character widths.
(33:365) The no of components :- integer is outside the allowed range 1-50
You may only turn off fallskew boxes for lengths of pipeline which contain no
more than 50 components. See the FALLSKEWS command.
(33:368) SPOOLNumbers must be positioned with table parameters
User-positioned text for spool numbers must include X and Y offsets within
its definition to form a tabular layout. See the POSITION command.

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual A-7


Version 11.6
Error Messages

(33:386) Bend radius outside allowable range 0 to 50 D


The permitted range for standard bend radii is 0-50 pipe diameters.
(33:387) Illegal value for bend radius
You can not specify a standard bend radius of less than 1 mm.
(33:399) Maximum of 20 nested PCOM tappings exceeded
Tapping legs off PCOMs or SHUs can themselves contain PCOMs or SHUs
with tapping legs, up to a maximum limit of 20 levels of nesting.
(33:407) Cannot detail at branch level for system iso
Detailing at Branch level is restricted to single pipe isometrics. System
isometrics must include complete pipes.
(33:408) Plottingscale limits (50-100%) exceeded - reset to 100
The plotting scale is limited to a reduction to a minimum of half size.
Magnification is not permitted. The scaling factor has been reset
automatically to 100%.
Note: The following error messages are generated during the operation of
ISODRAW. Those numbered (35:10xx) relate to the ISODAT program
and those numbered (35:20xx) relate to the ISOPLOT program.
Refer to the AVEVA PDMS Customer Support Department for advice if
you have unexplained errors at this stage of ISODRAFTs operations.
(35:1001) OVER 200 ALTERNATIVE TEXT RECS FOLLOWING DATA IGNORED
(35:1002) MORE THAN 200 TEXT RECORDS - DEFAULT TABLE USED
The maximum number of non-standard text phrases which may be used at
one time is 200 (see the ATEXT command).
(35:1004) FITTING NOT FOUND - DEFAULT SHAPE USED
A specified SKEY is not recognised. The relevant component will be indicated
on the isometric drawing by the default rectangle symbol (see VANTAGE
PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, chapter 9, Symbol Keys).
(35:1006)
to OVERFLOW IN DATA - PIPELINE REJECTED
(35:1014) (message number depends on reason for overflow)
This is a fatal error; the isometric will not be plotted.
(35:1015) INVALID ITEM/DESCRIPTION POINTER
(35:1016) ITEM CODE WIDTH ERROR - APPENDED TEXT LOST
An itemcode contains more characters than the specified column width in the
material list (see the ITEMCODE command).

A-8 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Error Messages

(35:1017) OVERFLOW IN DATA - CHECK DIMENSIONS


(35:1018) NO FITTING DETAILS EXIST FOR FITTING CODE
(35:1019) FITTINGS OVERLAP WHICH CANNOT BE CUT BACK
(35:1020) INSUFFICIENT LENGTH ON OVERLAPPING FITTINGS TO
ALLOW CUTBACK
(35:1021) RUN ABORTED
THE WIDTH OR HEIGHT (EXCLUDING BORDERS, MATERIAL LIST
ETC) IS LESS THAN 50MM. THIS IS NOT ENOUGH ROOM FOR THE
ISOMETRIC
The layout specified for the drawing sheet does not leave enough room for the
isometric drawing itself. The drawing will not therefore be plotted. See the
FILE, SIZE and STACKINGARRANGEMENT commands
(35:1022) THE MATERIAL CODE IS TOO WIDE AND HAS BEEN CHANGED FROM ...
TO ...
(35:1023) THE TOTAL NUMBER OF ALLOWED CHARACTERS (3,900) IN FREE
MESSAGES HAS BEEN EXCEEDED
(35:1024) THE NUMBER OF FREE MESSAGES (50) HAS BEEN EXCEEDED
(35:1025) THE NUMBER OF CHARACTERS IN MESSAGE EXCEED (300)
THE (LAST) MESSAGE BEGAN WITH ...
(35:1084) Warning - Support shape not found
(35:1100) Error - Unable to position ref.dimension using coordinates given
- Ref dimension record co-ords are val val val
- Ref dimension not shown on drawing
(35:1105) Warning - Reference Dimension key not found - Default line
shown
An invalid or blank SKEY has been used for a reference dimension. See
VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT User Guide, Chapter 4.

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual A-9


Version 11.6
Error Messages

(35:2001) DRAWING DELETED


(35:2003) WELD NUMBERS HAVE CAUSED DATA OVERFLOW
(35:2004) INPUT DATA OVERFLOW
(35:2005) WARNING TEE OFF TEE >4 DEEP
(35:2007) TEE IN SKEW
(35:2008) DATA FAULT SKEW
(35:2009) SKEW WITH NO CONTENTS
(35:2010) FITTING WITH OFFSET NOT IN LINE WITH PIPE
(35:2011) ANGLE FAIL
(35:2012) DATA FAULT
(35:2013) UP DOWN
(35:2014) EAST WEST
(35:2015) NORTH SOUTH
(35:2016) DATA OVERFLOW, DRAWING REJECTED
(35:2017) MESSAGE FAIL
(35:2018) SHAPE FAIL
(35:2020) TOO MANY COORDINATES IN FITTINGS
(35:2021) TOO MANY FITTINGS
(35:2023) WARNING, PAPER SIZE >A0 OR AD - THIS MAY PRODUCE
UNACCEPTABLE RESULTS
ISODRAFT does not recognise standard paper sizes larger than A0 or E.
Larger sheet sizes can be specified by using the HEIGHT and WIDTH options.
See the SIZE command.
(35:2024) REJECTED, TOO MUCH DATA, TRY SMALLER SPLIT
(35:2025) ... CHECK
(35:2026) ... FAIL
(35:2027) ... PLOTTED
(35:2028) ... NOT PLOTTED
(35:2029) ... DRG.
These are used in progress summaries in the message file.
(35:2030) WARNING PLOTFILE NUMBER HAS REACHED 999
NEXT PLOTFILE WILL OVERWRITE ...001
Plot file names are suffixed with a three-digit number to avoid ambiguity.
This limits the number of different plot files with the same basic file name to
999. See the FILE command.
(35:2031) THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS ARE IN PLOTFILE ...
(35:2035) READY FOR NEXT DRAWING. HIT RETURN TO GO
This message appears on screen between plots when more than one drawing
is to be output to a graphics terminal (see Section 4.3.1).

A-10 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Error Messages

(35:2036) THE FOLLOWING DRAWINGS WERE SENT TO THE TERMINAL


(35:2037) ERROR OPENING UNDERLAY PLOTFILE
(35:2038) ERROR READING PLOTFILE
(35:2039) PLOTFILE INCOMPATIBLE PAPER SIZE
(35:2040) BAD PLOT CODE - PLOTFILE PROBABLY CORRUPT
(35:2041) THE SCHEMA PLOTFILE OPTION HAS BEEN SWITCHED OFF
(35:2042) SPECIFIED PLOTFILE LENGTH ...
(35:2043) ... IS LESS THAN DRAWING LENGTH
(35:2044) PLOTFILE LENGTH HAS BEEN INCREASED TO ...

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual A-11


Version 11.6
B Examples of Isometric Plots
3 1
0 9
4 7 2 G F
9 2 R O
2 7 m D
1 2 0 2 e 1
1 4 9
6 2 t
O
T
1
N
0
2
1 s
y k
.
N
/22 1
811 5
060 +
4 04 704 S r
N
O
146
- L e
t
o
C CWS E SN "8 a w
0
1 1 ] 4[ 6 8
s
n t
2
N 9 5 2 9
9
e
d
A
1 e
/
2
-
5
8 1
B
1
G 1 n
o
A N
P
M S 2
1
8
F L C : _
U
P 2 "N
S
G 2
1
U
J :
C
E t
O
T
-
D
E
0
5
6
N
"
8
F G
7
F
E
P
S e
.
E 8 9
F7 3 1 6
9
2 8
F 2 R
G
l
N
N
-9 5 +
N4 1 9
2 7
0 L 0
T 5 : H N t
O
C
O L
CW S E 2
2
7 4 A 1
M A
E
T
C
T
I
P u
4
1
B
9
2
A
D
A
B
I
P O
4 2 9 D
1 3 2 2 3 EE
B 1 1 9 6 8 1 CP
G 1 4 1 4 AI
3 1 RP
1 9 T
G F 2 D
9 2 EE
F 1 GP
7 8 9 0 GI
8 7 2 4 AP
2 0 5 + L
7 4 4 T
0 6 1 L R
1 S 5 W S E O
0 N 6 EP
2 602 5 " 1 PP
9 6 IU
2 1 x 2 PNS
N + 4 8 6 O
/ 5 I
3
1
- 7 L
E ET
TC
P IE
M SN
U 6 N
P 5 O
- 3 C
O D 0 8 NT
T E 5 7 S PN
E 7 89 S 1 ] N MI
. F 9 31 0 N 1 " OO
N - 8 5+ 5 " [ 8 CJ
N N 1 1 9 8 D
O O L 1 x ET
C C W SE + 38 WN
EI
7 7 L
E S 5 RO
CJ
N S
2 " T
6 2 ED
x 1 KL
4 8 2 69 0 CE
260 2 6 42 4 OW
6 15 + S
1 54
L D
WS E LD
EL
IE
FW
PD
OL
HE
SW
0
0
6
1 2
]
3
[

6
0 4
2 2 9
2 4
1 2

2
]
2
[

0
0
1
2

O O
N N
L T
O S
O I
P L
S
E S
P T
I R
P A
P
S S
E E
T T
7 O O
N N
E E
D D
N ]
1 1
[
M M
2 2
Y - . . 1 2 21 8 3 2 2 2 Y - 3 2 6 8 1
T - 1 1 T - 1
Q - 1 Q -

E - E -
D - 5 D -
O - 1 O - 0 0
C - X 0 C - 0 0
- 0 0 0 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 - 0 0 1 1 9
M - 0 5 0 0 0 5 0 5 5 5 M - 0 5 R T 5
E - 2 1 2 2 22
a 1 2 1 1 1 E -- 2 1 B B -
T - a a a A cE a w w c g T - c c B B A
I - P P T T K E F F B B I --- G G S S G
-
-

) - 8 6 ) 6 6
. S - . S 1 1
SN - x x S N / /
.I - . I 3 3
N( - 8 6 8 8 88 6 8 6 6 6 N ( 8 6 1 1 8
M B B L
T S S E
5 5 S A A K
0 0 A C
BB B 1 1 & & I
PP P A A 0 M N
WW W 5 T S S H H
-- - M M 1 S S S 2 2 %
44 4 T T # A / / 9
B B B B 33 3 S S 0 0 7 7
- - P P 22 2 A A W 0 5 5 B B F
L L W W AA A B 5 1 1 - - R
5 5 - - F F 1 # # 3 3 .
4 4 MM M R R 0 # 9 9 0
I I 3 3 TT T . . 1 5 5 1 1 5
P P 2 2 SS S 0 0 . W . . A A 1
- | - A A A A AA A 5 5 6 B 6 6 #
- - 1 1 1 1 1 M M
- S - 0 0 M M WW W # # B 0 B B T T 0 0
- L - N - 1 1 T T BB B S - 1 - | - N - S S S - 1 6 .
- A - O - . . S S 5 5 M - I . - - O - I I A A M - . 7
- I - I - 6 6 A A 99 9 . . E - S 6 - S - I - S S E - 6 1
- R - T - 3 3 .. . 6 6 T - N 1 - L - T - N N S S T - 1
- E - P - B B W W 66 6 1 1 I - A B - A - P - A A T T I - B
- T - I - B B 11 1 B B - - I - I - U U -
- A - R - I I BB B E - K I - R - R - M M N N E - I
- M - C - S S 9 9 I I N - H S - E - C - M M N - S ] 0
- - S - N N . . II I S S I - C N - T - S - 5 5 2 2 I - N 4 8 .
- N - E - A A 6 6 SS S N N L - A - A - E - . . L - A [ 4
- O - D - 1 1 NN N A A - - G - M - D - 1 1 W W - -
- I - - 0 0 B B AA A N - N E - - - C C N - E S - ]
- T - T - 4 4 N N I - I T - N - T - F F I - T L - 3
- A - N - H H I I GR R W W - W B A B - O - N - R R D D - A O - [ )
- C - E - C C S - S S NL L / - S C G C - I - E - U U / - G O - S
- I - N - S S G - N N OW S - E E - W W - T - N - S - T T T T - P - ] N
- R - O - N - A A LO W E - G G S - E - E - - C - O - T - E E S S S - E L S - 2 I
- B - P - E E I - O G - N N E - V 6 V 6 - E - P - E - K K S - E - V E - [ ( H
- A - M - E - P P T - E E PB B N - A A V - L 1 L 1 - R - M - K - S S T - 0 0 V - L E E - T
- F - O - P - I I T - E E AL L A - L L L - A 2 A 2 - E - O - S - A A L - 0 0 L - A T P - ] S G
- - C - I - P P I - T T CE E L - F F A - V A V A - - C - A - G G O - 1 1 A - V S I - 1 N N
- | - P - F - F - V - - | - G - B - V - P - [
E
E L
1 2 3 4 56 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 P
TO - 1 1 T O- 1 1 1 1 1 I L
PN - P N- P C

Figure B.1: Combined Fabrication & Erection Isometric with Materials List

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual B-1


Version 11.6
N

B-2
06
22

2062
Examples of Isometric Plots

49
2 229

6"NS

94
14
407 229
58
EL +1950 229 9
6"N
S

Figure B.2:
403
22
9

407 229

2062
[2]
21
00
16
00
[3]

8x6"NS 29
16
2
166

8x6"NS 8x8"NS
178
6
35
6
2 35
166 EL +1950
178 14
83
[1]
[4]
8"NS

8"NS
404

Fabrication-Only Isometric
MATL
A150

292
407

DATE: 27 JUL 1998


BATCH REF: Condensate System
PIPING SPEC: A1A
[1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO SHOPFIELD SOCKETSCREWED
COMPN SITE PIPE LAGGEDTRACED DRG
1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO WELDWELD WELD JOINT JOINT CONNECTION
SUPPORTPIPE PIPE 1 OF 1
Outlet_Network

Version 11.6
VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual
N

Version 11.6
06
22

2062
17

CONN. TO
CON-FEED-PUMP-1/N2 11
W 1897 18
S 1538 49
EL +1950 2 22
9 9
6"NS CONN. TO
CON-FEED-PUMP-2/N2
4 10
7 W 497
94 S 1538
14 EL +1950 25 58
9
6"N
8 S
3
EL +1950 229 229 23

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


24
407 229

Figure B.3:
21 403
229
16 407
22

2062
15
[2]
21
00
16
00
[3] 29
16
8x6"NS
14

2
166
12 19
8x8"NS 13

2 CONN. TO
26 C-108/N1
20 W 4612
178 S 6012
[1] 6 EL +5120
EL +1950
8"NS 35

Erection-Only Isometric
2
27 31
166 356
1 178 14
83
8x6"NS
[4]
8"NS

W 4078
404

W 5146 S 4529
S 4529 EL +4012
EL +4012 30

292
29 MATL
A150
407

28
DATE: 27 JUL 1998
BATCH REF: Condensate System
PIPING SPEC: A1A
[1] DENOTES PIPE SPOOL NO COMPN SITE
SHOPFIELD SOCKETSCREWED PIPE LAGGEDTRACED DRG
1 DENOTES PARTS LIST NO SUPPORTPIPE PIPE
WELDWELD WELD JOINT JOINT CONNECTION 1 OF 1
Outlet_Network
Examples of Isometric Plots

B-3
Examples of Isometric Plots

B-4 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
C Transferring Data to the COMPIPE Module

PDMS ISODRAFT has a facility to transfer material information to the COMPIPE


module of the John Brown Systems COMDACE system. This is achieved by the output
of two files containing COMPIPE Linelist and MTO data. You can control the production
and content of these files. COMPIPE component Short Codes are accessed direct from
the PDMS catalog databases, providing pointers into the COMPIPE piping specification.

C.1 Invoking the COMPIPE Interface in ISODRAFT

The COMPIPE interface is switched on by specifying a single file prefix, used to define
the Linelist and MTO files. ISODRAFT will create files using this prefix with suffixes of
.LINE and .MTO, together with a three digit number of the form 001, taking the next
file in sequence in the directory. To set the file prefix enter the command:
COMPIPEFile /<filename>.
To switch off this facility, enter the command COMPIPEFile OFF.
For example, the command COMPIPEFile /comp would produce Linelist files of the form
comp.LINE001, comp.LINE002, etc. and MTO files of the form comp.MTO001,
comp.MTO002, etc.

C.2 Controlling the Contents of the COMPIPE Files

The options that affect the contents of the COMPIPE files generated by ISODRAFT are:
COMPIPE MTO DRWG Lists material by individual isometric drawing sheet.
COMPIPE MTO PIPE Lists material by complete pipeline.
COMPIPE ITEMcodes User Instructs COMPIPE to use user itemcodes.
COMPIPE ITEMcodes Client Instructs COMPIPE to use client temcodes.
COMPIPE DESCriptions Short Instructs COMPIPE to use short descriptions.
COMPIPE DESCriptions Long Instructs COMPIPE to use long descriptions.
COMPIPE SUPPorts ON Includes supports in the MTO file.
COMPIPE SUPPorts OFF Excludes supports from the MTO file.
These may be chained. The default condition is COMPIPE MTO DRWG ITEMcodes User
DESCriptions Short SUPPorts ON. Note that a materiallist overflow option other than
MATEriallist DUMMy (the default condition) must be used with COMPIPE MTO DRWG.

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual C-1


Version 11.6
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation

C.3 Pipe Attributes

Four text attributes of pipe are used by the COMPIPE interface. These are:
CARE COMPIPE area up to 4 characters, mandatory
DESCRIPTION Pipeline description up to 80 characters, optional
CDRG COMPIPE drawing number up to 24 characters, optional
CNUM COMPIPE line number up to 14 characters, optional
The CNUM attribute is available so that a line number may be stored for COMPIPE
purposes that differs from the PDMS pipe NAME. If CNUM is blank or unset, the first
14 characters of the NAME will be used. Note that the pipeline DESCRIPTION is
output in the Linelist file. This should not be confused with the option for COMPIPE
DESCRIPTIONS, which is an instruction in the MTO file to COMPIPE on how to output
component descriptions in its reports.

C.4 Detail Text Attributes

Two attributes of detail texts (ADTEX - HDTEX) are used by the COMIPE interface.
These are:
SCOD Short Code up to 3 characters, mandatory
CSPC COMPIPE Specification up to 6 characters, optional
All components, tube and bolts must have a short code, unless they are to be treated in
COMPIPE as out-of-spec items. In this case they may only be handled as additional
items on the material list. If any other component is found to have no short code, no
COMPIPE files will be generated for the whole pipeline.
For standard assemblies, the short code of SAN must be used. Standard assemblies are
listed in the MTO file with their itemcodes (truncated to 8 characters) as their standard
assembly numbers.
The COMPIPE Specification attribute allows a COMPIPE Specification name to be used
that differs from the PDMS Pipe Specification name. If CSPC is blank or unset, the
PDMS Pipe Specification of the component will be used (truncated to 6 characters).

C.5 Limitations

C.5.1 Itemcodes containing the / character


The slash (/) character is used by default as a delimiter within the Intermediate Data
File (transfer file) between itemcodes, short codes and COMPIPE Spec names.
Therefore, if itemcodes are to contain slash characters (e.g. in the case of ITEMCODE
LENGTH LONG where the specification name is included), an alternative delimiter must
be set as ATEXT 299. Note that it is the itemcode after SPEC name and trailing
delimiter characters have been removed that is important. Since the slash character is

C-2 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation

often used within PDMS names, ISODRAFT will automatically set Atext 299 to the tilde
(~) character when COMPIPEFILE is set. This can then be changed if required, e.g. use
ATExt 299 :.

C.5.2 Instruments and Supports Tag Names


Instrument and support names will be output in the MTO files only if the options
INSTruments NAMe and ATTAname SPREf are used. Instrument and support itemcodes
will never be output in the MTO files.

C.5.3 Material per Isometric Sheet


In order to obtain MTO per isometric drawing, a material list overflow option that may
insert extra sheet numbers should not be used. Instead, use one of:
MATEriallist OVER
MATEriallist DUMMy SUFFix
MATEriallist DUMMy SUFFix SINGle
If the default option MATEriallist DUMMy is used, a warning occurs in the message file. It
states Compipe material accumulation per drawing conflicts with material list
generated on isometric. Compipe materials accumulated per pipeline. Any isometrics
splitting onto more than one sheet will be accompanied by MTO files listing all
materials for the pipeline as if on a single sheet.

C.5.4 Specification Breaks


The output of Alternative Spec records and the subsequent addition of the Y prefix to
each Short Code from the new specification is affected by the SPECBreak option. If
SPECBreak BRANch is used, e.g. to suppress specbreaks for instruments from a special
instruments specification on the isometric, then these items will be output in the MTO
file as if from the standard specification.

C.5.5 System and Spool Isometrics


COMPIPE files will not be produced for system isometrics or spool isometrics.

C.5.6 Use of MARK REV, MARK DETAIL, REPEATABILITY ON


These will fail to update the database when COMPIPEFile is used in conjunction with a
CNUM. The actual pipe NAME must be used in order to allow these database updates.

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual C-3


Version 11.6
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation

C.6 Format of COMPIPE Linelist File

The Linelist file contains a single batch header record, followed by a group of three
records for each pipeline in the batch:
Batch Header
Line List Header for each pipeline
Delivery Point Details for each pipeline
Line Description for each pipeline
In the following record definitions, the : character is a field separator, and the *
character is a record terminator.

C-4 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation

The Batch Header record is defined thus:


BATCH888821JAN99LINEPROJNUMB
where:
BATCH is a fixed record identifier
8888 is a fixed 4 digit batch sequence number
21JAN99 is the run date when the pipe was detailed
LINE is a fixed identifier for a Linelist file
PROJNUMB is the project number (truncated to 8 characters)
The Line List Header record is defined thus:
A:AREA:LINENUMBER:PIPE SPEC:NO OF SHEETS:MAIN SIZE::PAINT
SPEC:INSU SPEC::*
where
A is a fixed record identifier
AREA is from the pipe AREA attribute (max 4 characters)
LINENUMBER is from the pipe CNUM or NAME (truncated to 14 characters)
PIPE SPEC is from the pipe PSPEC (truncated to 6 characters)
NO OF SHEETS is the number of isometric sheets for the pipeline, e.g. 02
MAIN SIZE is the largest nominal size in the pipe, of the form 1.1/2, 6, etc. for
imperial, and 25, 80, etc. for metric
PAINT SPEC is from the paint specification (truncated to 6 characters)
INSU SPEC is from the insulation specification (truncated to 6 characters)
The Delivery Point Details record is defined thus:
D::::::*
This is a dummy record, normally used for delivery point and date information during
manual input. Such information is not available from ISODRAFT.
The Line Description record is defined thus:
H:DESCRIPTION*
where:
H is a fixed record identifier
DESCRIPTION is from the pipe DESC attribute (max 80 characters). If no
description has been entered in PDMS, a dummy record of the form
H:* is output.

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual C-5


Version 11.6
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation

C.7 Format of COMPIPE MTO FIle

The MTO file contains a single batch header record, followed by a group of records for
each pipeline or isometric sheet:
Batch Header
MTO Line Header |
MTO Drawing Header | for each pipeline
Component records | or isometric sheet
(one record for each material list entry) |
A maximum of 200 pipelines or isometric sheets may be included in each file. In the
following record definitions, the : character is a field separator, and the * character is a
record terminator.
The Batch Header record is defined thus:
BATCH888821JAN99MATOPROJNUMB
where:
BATCH is a fixed record identifier
8888 is a fixed 4 digit batch sequence number
21JAN99 is the run date when the pipe was detailed
MATO is a fixed identifier for an MTO file
PROJNUMB is the project number (truncated to 8 characters)
The MTO Line Header record is defined thus:
$L:AREA:LINENUMBER:SHEET NO:RUNTYPE::U or C:S or L*
where:
$L is a fixed record identifier
AREA is from the pipe AREA attribute (max 4 characters)
LINENUMBER is from the pipe CNUM or NAME (truncated to 14 characters)
SHEET NO is the isometric sheet number, e.g. 01
RUNTYPE is data type transferred, always set to A (Actual)
U or C signifies reports will have User or Client Itemcodes
S or L signifies reports will have Short or Long Descriptions
The Drawing Header record is defined thus:
$D:DRWGNUMBER::REVISION*
where:
$D is a fixed record identifier
DRWGNUMBER is from the pipe CDRG attribute (max 24 characters)
REVISION is from the pipe REV attribute (max 2 characters)
If the CDRG attribute for a pipe is unset or blank, a drawing number will be
automatically generated, based on the pipe nominal size and name. This will take the
form:

C-6 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation

1.1/2PIPENAME for pipes using imperial bores


40MM-PIPENAME for pipes using metric bores (MM- is the default Atext 453)
Each component entry on the material list has an equivalent entry in the MTO file.
Components are classified as in-spec being in the specification set at pipe level,
alternative-spec being in a different specification, and out-of-spec being in no pipe
specification (a concept PDMS does not have).
The in-Spec Component record is defined thus:
n::SHORT CODE:TAG NUMBER:1st NS:2nd NS:3rd
NS:QUANTITY:BOLTLENGTH:*
where:
n = 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE, = 3 for SHOP flag
= FALSE
SHORT CODE is from the detail texts SCOD (max 3 characters)
TAG NUMBER unique identifier (max 8 characters), see Notes
1st NS is main size, of the form 1.1/2 (imperial) or 40 (metric)
2nd NS is second size (format as for 1st NS)
3rd NS is third size (format as for 1st NS)
QUANTITY is quantity for component, tube or bolt sets (max 6 characters)
BOLTLENGTH is length of bolts, see Notes
Notes:
(1) Short code is a reference to a component entry in the Compipe specification.
(2) Instruments and supports take a tag number from their PDMS name if the
options INSTruments NAMe and ATTAname SPREf are used.
(3) Standard assemblies take a tag number of their itemcode, which is not unique,
but is the same for all assemblies of the same content/configuration, i.e. standard
assembly number.
(4) Quantity is an integer number for components, or a length for tube. For bolts it is
the number of sets, not the number of bolts. Also for bolts, the size is the pipeline
nominal size, not the bolt diameter.
(5) Boltlength is preceded by the character H to indicate an override to COMPIPE.
Metric lengths take the form H120.0. Imperial lengths take the form H4.3/4.
Where a change of spec occurs in the pipeline, an Alternative Spec record is output,
defined thus:
n::YY:ALTERNATESPEC:::::*
where:
n = 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE, = 3 for SHOP flag = FALSE
YY is a fixed identifier to indicate alternative spec
ALTERNATESPEC is the alternative spec name (max 6 characters)
Components from the alternative spec then follow, with records to the same format as
in-spec components, except that a Y character is output as a prefix to their short code. A
return to the standard spec for the pipe is indicated by the additional Y character no
longer being output. Note that the output of Alternative spec records may be suppressed
if the SPECBreak BRANch option is used.

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual C-7


Version 11.6
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation

Out-of-specification components take two records, defined thus:


n:::ITEMCODE:QUANTITY*
where:
n = 1 for SHOP flag = TRUE,
= 3 for SHOP flag = FALSE
ITEMCODE is from the components itemcode (max 12 characters)
QUANTITY is quantity for component, tube or bolt sets
N.S.:::::::*
where:
N.S. is the nominal size of the component
Note: Out-of-specification components can only be from `additional items on
the material list' in ISODRAFT, i.e. not normal pipeline components.

C-8 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
D Recommendations for Importing DXF files
from ISODRAFT into MicroStation

D.1 Introduction

Isometrics produced using ISODRAFT can be passed into MicroStation as DXF files for
amendment or the production of a DGN equivalent for issue. These notes refer only to
MicroStation/J and the DXF files produced from ISODRAFT.
A straightforward import of an ISODRAFT DXF file into a freshly installed version of
MicroStation/J produces a picture which has accurate rendition of the isometric vectors
but fonts and colour are not correct. Neither can a plot be produced, as the colour is
white on white.
The comments in these notes refer mainly to fonts and colour and how to bring them
into line with the original isometric. Experienced MicroStation users may know simpler
ways of doing this.

D.2 Importing a DXF File

MicroStation has basic facilities for the importation of DXF files. You have the chance to
do this when invoking MicroStation or if already running MicroStation then the
Edit>Import menu would be used.
During import you may be invited to change various parameters to do with the control of
DXF/DGN translations. Initially at least these should be ignored and the DXF file
simply opened to observe the results.

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual D-1


Version 11.6
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation

D.3 Fonts

PDMS has a very large number of font files that have been assembled over a long period
from the public domain, in-house and the user community. They have all been
translated to the AutoCAD standard and take the form of pairs of source (.shp) and
compiled (.shx) files.

D.3.1 Installing Fonts


ISODRAFT uses only one set of PDMS text style/font associations:

Text style Font


HTX1 o8116901

To make AutoCAD-type fonts available within MicroStation the relevant fonts must be
installed into MicroStation using the standard facilities:

D.3.2 Utilities/Install Fonts menu.


To keep them separate the required fonts should be installed into a new font library
called, perhaps, pdms.rsc which should be placed with the supplied libraries in the path:
... \bentley\workspace\system\symb
MicroStation refers to fonts by a number not by the name.
Now use the Element>Text menu to check the installation. The newly installed fonts
should be visible together with the font numbers assigned by MicroStation to the new
fonts.
If required you may change the MicroStation font number as follows:
1. Use the Utilities>Install Fonts menu to give the Font installer dialog box.
2. Select font file on destination and change to desired font number.
The new fonts will not yet be visible to the MicroStation import function.

D.4 DXF/DGN translation: Making Fonts Active for the


Import Function

DXF/DGN Import and export operations refer to a compiled file which on installed
MicroStation/J is:
...\bentley\home\prefs\dwgdata\dwgcontrol.bas

D-2 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation

On some installations, this may alternatively be:


...\bentley\Workspace\system\tables\dwg\dwg.bas
This file is a macro file written in the MicroStation macro language BASIC that controls
several areas where translations between DWG and DGN are specified. One of these
areas is font mapping.
For AutoCAD fonts the font style is obtained from the shx/shp font file and a shape file
may have many styles.
In MicroStation/J this condition is recognised. In order to map a particular style
associated with a font file to the required MicroStation font number, it is necessary to
include extra information in the font section of the translation control file. For example:
MbeFontNameTable.addImportEntry "htx1", "o8116901", 168, 1.09, 0
The last two optional parameters enable control of text width and text obliquity (slope)
which MicroStation does not handle well.
This line maps style htx1 in font file o8116901.shx to the MicroStation font 168 using an
X scaling factor of 1.09 and no oblique characters. The value of 1.09 for this particular
mapping was obtained by experiment and compensates for the arbitrary character
spacing output by ISODRAFT.
For the PDMS fonts there is one style per file.

D.5 Compilation of the DXF/DGN Macro Control File

The MicroStation/J macro control file, dwgcontrol.bas, should be compiled after editing.
1. On the Utilities>Macro window choose Browse
2. Select dwgcontrol.bas.
3. Running the macro constitutes compilation.
It is possible that when the macro is run an error message will appear. In this case the
necessary DXF/DGN translators are not yet available to MicroStation and to make them
available it is necessary to use the import function on any DXF file:
1. On the file/import menu choose DWG or DXF and load any DXF file.
2. Now repeat the Utilities>Macro actions above, and exit MicroStation.
3. On restart using the DXF option, the font translation will be active and a true
rendition of text should be seen.

D.6 Use of 16-bit Fonts (Far Eastern Fonts)

It is not possible to install any 16 bit font (.shx) file into MicroStation/J or earlier.

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual D-3


Version 11.6
Recommendations for Importing DXF files from ISODRAFT into MicroStation

D.7 Colour

There is no explicit colour information in the ISODRAFT DXF file. The PDMS colour
information is implicit. This is because of a convention used, which associates a layer
name with a colour. This means that layer name GT_n in the DXF file means PDMS
colour n. Thus all objects with the same colour are on the same DXF layer.

In MicroStation an incoming DXF file turns on a default colour table that appears to be
the default colour table used by AutoCAD:
Individual objects have the default colour value 6 (on a scale starting at 0) which
translates to the AutoCAD default 7 (on a scale starting at 1).
The colour value is white so everything is white and there can never be any
discrimination between colours.
Symbology is not set for any object, so when it is turned on everything changes to red
(0), which is 1 on the AutoCAD default table.
The PDMS colour information in the DXF file delivered as GT_ layer names may be
translated to MicroStation level values by use of the layer/level mapping file used in the
import process.
The default file for this is: dwglevel.tbl (in ..\Bentley\Workspace\system\tables\dwg). Thus
PDMS colours 1 12 (Layers GT_1 to GT_2) may be made manifest in the DGN file as
levels 1 - 12 by additional entries to this file:

Layer in DXF file Level


GT_1 1
GT 2 2
.
GT_12 12

In order to produce true PDMS colours in MicroStation DGN files, it will be necessary to
provide a key-in command as a mdl (MicroStation Development Language) function
that will map the DGN levels to PDMS colours.

D.8 Plotting the DGN file

To get a normal black and white plot of the MicroStation DGN file created on import it
is necessary to reduce the number of colours set in the active file: printer.plt. The value
of num_pens in this file should be changed from 255 to 1.

D-4 VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Index

Index

**Empty**, 1-2 BOLTFILE, 2-21


ADD, 2-11 Bolting
Adding elements, 2-11 length descriptions, 2-22
ALLO attribute, 2-89 BOLTING, 2-22
Alternative texts, 4-1 BOLTREPORT, 2-24, 2-25
ANGLEACCURACY, 2-13 Bores
ATEXT, 2-14 units, 2-26
Atexts, 4-1 BORES, 2-26
Attached text, 2-16 CHANGE HIGHLIGHTING, 2-27
ATTANAME, 2-16 character height, 2-28, 2-122
ATTAs Character size, 2-8
identifying, 2-8, 2-16 CHARHEIGHT, 2-28
split, 2-9, 2-136 CHECK, 2-30
ATTEXTS, 2-16 CLLENGTHFILE, 2-32
AXES, 2-18 Commands, 1-2
Bend table abbreviations, 1-2
Atexts, 4-13 arguments, 1-2
Bending table, 2-118 COMPIPE, 1
Bendradius Files, 1, 4
bend table, 2-19 Interface, 1
radii description units, 2-19 MTO file, 6
standard, 2-19 Pipe attributes, 2
BENDRADIUS, 2-19 Text attributes, 2
Blank area, reserving, 2-138 Continuation notes, 2-8, 2-34
Bolt Report Continuation Notes, 2-34
Atexts, 4-13 Continuation symbols, 2-8, 2-33
description, 2-24 Continuation welds, 2-34
file specification, 2-21 CONTINUATIONSYMBOLS, 2-33
output, 2-24 Continuing welds, 2-34

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual Index-i


Version 11.6
Index

CONTNOTES, 2-34 Atexts, 4-13


CONTWELDS, 2-34 ELEVATION, 2-62
COORDINATES, 2-36 Elevation coordinates, 2-8, 2-62
COORDS, 2-36 EQUIPMENTNUMBERING, 2-63
Creating macros, 2-132 Erection details, 2-79
Cut pipe list, 2-41 Error messages, 1
CUTBACK, 2-38 Fabrication details, 2-79
Cutmarks, 2-40 Fall rate, 2-8, 2-64
CUTMARKS, 2-40 FALLINGLINES, 2-64
CUTPIPELISTFILE, 2-41, 2-42 FALLSKEWS, 2-68
CUTTINGLIST, 2-43, 2-44 File
Date message file, 2-104
format, 2-45 specifying plot file, 2-69
DATE, 2-45 transfer, 2-126, 2-128, 2-129
Default settings FILE, 2-69
resetting, 2-107 Flow arrows, 2-8, 2-71
DELETE, 2-46 FLOWARROWS, 2-71
DELIMITER, 2-46 format file, 2-41
Design conditions table, 2-119 FRAME, 2-72
DETAIL, 2-48 Frame lines, 2-72
Detail areas, dynamic, 4-13 Grip length, 2-38
DETAILPLOTS, 2-119 INSTALL SETUP, 2-74
DIMDIST, 2-52 INSTNAME, 2-75
Dimensioning style, 2-8, 2-53 Instruments
Dimensions display, 2-75
drawing sheet, 2-140 Insulation
DIMENSIONS, 2-53 plotting, 2-8, 2-77
Distance units, 2-59 INSULATIONCONTROL, 2-77
DISTANCES, 2-59 ISO, 2-78
Drawing history table, 2-118 Isometric
DTEXTS, 2-60, 2-61 annotating, 2-117
dxf, 2-69 Atexts, 4-1
DXF, 1 display of information, 2-79
Dynamic detail areas plotting scale, 2-116

index-ii VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Index

scaling, 2-9, 2-113 MESSAGEFILENAME, 2-102, 2-104


ISOTYPE, 2-79 MicroStation, 2-69
Item numbering, 2-63 MTEXTS, 2-105
ITEMCODE, 2-81, 2-83 Numbering joints, 2-85
JOINTNUMBERS, 2-85 Numbering pulled bends, 2-112
Kanji OPTIONS, 2-107
EUC format, 2-69 OUTCOM, 2-108
SHIFTJS format, 2-69 OVERALLSKEWS, 2-111
KEYS, 2-86 PBENDNUMBERS, 2-112
LEGLENGTH, 2-87 PICTURESCALE, 2-113
Line Summary PLOTDETAILDATA, 2-114
Atexts, 4-11 Plotted leg length, 2-8, 2-87
LINETHICKNESS, 2-88 Plotting isometrics, 2-48
LOOSEFLANGEALLOWANCE, 2-89, 3-19 PLOTTINGSCALE, 2-116
Margin POSITION, 2-117
width specification, 2-90 POSTPROCESS, 2-126
MARGIN, 2-90 PRECISION, 2-127
MARK, 2-91 PREPROCESS, 2-128
MATCONTROL, 2-92 PROCESS, 2-129
Material Control File, 5-1 Project number, 2-130
creating, 2-92 PROJECTNUMBER, 2-130
Creating, 5-1 QUERY, 2-131
Definition, 5-1 Querying options, 2-131
extended, 5-1 RECREATE, 2-132
Format, 5-2 REFDIMENSIONS, 2-133
Material descriptions, 2-60, 2-105 Reference dimensions, 2-9, 2-133
Material list Relative text positioning, 2-121
Atexts, 4-8, 4-12 REMOVE, 2-134, 2-135
item numbering, 2-63 Removing elements, 2-134
Material List REPEATABILITY, 2-136
displaying, 2-94 RESERVE, 2-138
MATERIALLIST, 2-94 Screen layout
MATLISTFILENAME, 2-100 saving, 2-74
Measurement units, 2-9, 2-170 SIZE, 2-139, 2-140

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual Index-iii


Version 11.6
Index

SKEWBOX, 2-141 TEE, 3-40, 3-41, 3-42, 3-43, 3-44


Skewed piping, 2-9, 2-141 TRAP, 3-45, 3-46, 3-47
Spatial coordinates, 2-8, 2-36 UNIO, 3-48
SPECBREAK, 2-146 UNIV, 3-49
SPLIT, 2-148 Universal, 3-49
Splitting drawings, 2-9, 2-148 VALV, 3-50, 3-51, 3-52
Splitting tubes, 2-9, 2-167 VENT, 3-53
SPOOLNUMBERS, 2-150 VFWA, 3-54
STACKINGARRANGEMENT, 2-152 VTWA, 3-55
Standard text WELD, 3-56
changing, 2-14 Symbol library, 2-156
SUPPORTFILENAME, 2-154 SYMBOLFILENAME, 2-156
SUPPORTS, 2-155 TAGGING, 2-157
Symbol keys TAPPING, 2-158
BEND, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13 Text
CAP, 3-3 positioning, 2-117
CLOS, 3-4 rotating, 2-118
COUP, 3-5, 3-6 TEXTPOSITION, see POSITION, 2-117
CROS, 3-7, 3-8 Title block
definitions, 3-1 Atexts, 4-6
deleting, 2-46 TITLEBLOCK, 2-161
ELBO, 3-9, 3-10, 3-11, 3-12, 3-13 TOLERANCE, 2-163
FBLI, 3-14 TRACINGCONTROL, 2-164
FILT, 3-15, 3-16, 3-17 Transfer file
FLAN, 3-18, 3-19 creating, 2-30
FTUB, 3-20 processing, 2-129
INST, 3-21, 3-22, 3-23, 3-24, 3-25, 3-26, 3- TRANSFERFILENAME, 2-165
27
TRUNCATE, 2-166
LJSE, 3-28
TUBESPLITS, 2-167
OLET, 3-40, 3-41, 3-42, 3-43, 3-44
UNDERLAYPLOTNAME, 2-168
PCOM, 3-29, 3-30, 3-31, 3-32
UNITS, 2-170
REDU, 3-33
User Defined Tables, 2-118
reference, 3-58
View direction, 2-78
SHU, 3-39
WASTAGE AREA, 2-171

index-iv VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual


Version 11.6
Index

Weld Box identification, 2-9, 2-173


Atexts, 4-12 numbering, 2-9, 2-174
Weld table, 2-119 types displayed, 2-9, 2-176
WELDID, 2-173 WELDTYPE, 2-176
WELDNUMBERS, 2-174 ZEROLENGTHSKEWS, 2-177
Welds

VANTAGE PDMS ISODRAFT Reference Manual Index-v


Version 11.6